CDMA Performance Parameter (1x Section

CDMA Performance Parameter
(1x Section)
About This Manual
Product Version
The following table lists the product versions related to this document.
Product Name Product Version
BSC6680 V300R006
Organization
This manual describes the basic principles and the related performances of the Huawei CDMA 1x BSS
system. It consists of eight chapters and is organized as follows.
Chapter 1 Basic System Parameters Describes the Synchronization Channel parameters, Paging
Channel parameters, and Access Channel parameters in the CDMA2000 system.
Chapter 2 Forward Power Distribution Parameters Describes the channel parameter
configuration.
Chapter 3 Power Estimation and Control Parameters Describes the parameters of different kinds
of forward and reverse power control, estimate of forward SCH initial power, and reverse SCH closed
loop power control..
Chapter 4 Load Control and Load Management Parameters Describes the parameters of load
access load control, and forward and reverse load control.

Chapter 5 Paing and Access Parameters Describes the algorithm used in the paging and access
procedure, including access macro diversity, access handoff, carrier assign, optimization of paging
message scheduling related parameters.
Chapter 6 1X Call Drop Mechanism Describes the related parameters of 1X call drop..
Chapter 7 Handoff Parameters Describes the handoff algorithms, including soft handoff algorithm,
hard handoff algorithm, detection and configuration of missing neighbor cells related parameters.
Chapter 8 1x Data Service Parameters Describes the key RRM algorithms about data service,
including SCH assigning strategies, forward SCH soft handoff, forward SCH extension, and reverse
SCH soft handoff related parameters.
Chapter 9 GSRDM and EGSRDM Parameters Describes the GSRDM and EGSRDM related
parameters.
Intended Audience
This manual is applicable to the engineer who is familiar with the basic concept of the CDMA 2000
system.
About Parameters Name
The English name of each parameter is the English identification of the parameter in the command
name. In this guide, the Chinese name of parameter must be consistent with that in the command name.
For example, “ROUTEUP” and “ROUTEUP” are the English identifications of the parameter in
command name.
Parameter Information is shown below:
About Chapter Name
This guide is organized according to function type, such as parameters of forward overload control
belong to Chapter 4 Load Control and Load Management Parameters.
About Description
This field specifies the meaning of the parameter.
About Type
This field specifies the parameter type: An algorithm parameter or a Um interface parameter. For a
Um interface parameter, the system messages that contains the parameter and corresponding domain
are given.
About Command Name
Command name of maintenance console related to the parameters described in this section. The
command name includes MOD XX and LST XX. For some special parameters, ADD XX and RMV
XX are also included.
About Range and Unit
This field specifies the range of the parameter. The value range is closely related to the data structure.
About Recommended Value
It is a default value of system, but not always applicable in any case. In combination with the practical
requirements, refer to the description of “Setting tradeoff” to define the parameter value. If the default
value is inconsistent with recommended value in this guide, the recommended value prevails.
About Setting Tradeoff
The effect after increasing or decreasing the parameter based on recommended value.
About Remarks
It is used to describe further the meanings of some parameters.
About Configuration Examples
It is to show how to configure the parameters in the typical scene. For special application, the
configuration of parameters should consider combination and cooperation. It should not be copied
directly for modification.
Acronyms and Abbreviations
Acronyms and Abbreviations Full Name
AAA Authentication, Authorization and Account
ACK Acknowledgement
BSC Base Station Controller
BTS Base Transceiver Station
CDMA Code Division Multiple Access

ESN Electronic Serial Number
FCS Frame Check Sequence
HLR Home Location Register
IMSI International Mobile Subscriber Identity
IOS Inter-Operation Specification
MAC Medium Access Control
MNID Mobile Node Identification
NAI Network Access Identifier
NAK Not Acknowledgement
NID Network Identification
PCF Packet Control Function
PDSN Packet Data Service Node
PDU Packet Data Unit
PPP Point-to-Point Protocol
PZID Packet Zone Identification
QoS Quality of Service
RLP Radio Link Protocol
RoT Rise Over Thermal
SID System Identification
SINR Signal Interference and Noise Ratio

Chapter 1 Basic System Parameters
1.1 Synchronization Channel Parameters
1.1.1 LPSEC
1. Description
This parameter indicates the seconds after the system time starts, that is, the value of the GPS
time that is earlier than the actual time. It cannot be modified on the Airbridge maintenance
system. The value is fixed within a year.
Based on received satellite signals, the LPSEC is adjusted automatically by the BTS clock
module. The parameters configured by the BSC are ineffective.
LC_STATE and SYS_TIME are set in the same mode.
1.1.2 LOCTMOFF (Local Time Offset)
1. Description
This parameter indicates the local time zone, namely, the offset of the local time to the Greenwich
Mean Time (GMT).
China is located in the time zone of GMT+8:00, so the LTM_OFF sent in the SCHM is 16 (16 x
30 minutes = 8 hours). Some countries use the daylight saving time system. In fact, the
Qualcomm chips do not support the daylight saving time. If necessary, the daylight saving time
can be realized only by modifying the LTM_OFF. If daylight saving time system is used in time
zone GMT+8:00, the DST time is one hour earlier than the actual time, that is, LTM_OFF is set
to 50, namely, time zone GMT+9:00.

2. Type
Um interface parameter of sector carrier level, sent in the SCHM.
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD SCHM
Query: LST SYSMSGPARA: CCMINF=SCHM;
4. Range and Unit
0–63 (corresponding to –32–31), in a unit of 30 minutes

5. Recommended Value
48 (corresponding to 16), that is time zone GMT+8:00.

6. Setting Tradeoff
It is set based on the time zone where the system is located.
7. Remarks
Settings vary with the time offset of the time zone.
　 LF8 –8 (GMT –12:00) - time zone GMT–12
　 LF10–10 (GMT –11:00)
　 LF12–12 (GMT –10:00)
　 LF14–14 (GMT –09:00)
　 LF16–16 (GMT –08:00)
　 LF18–18 (GMT –07:00)
　 LF20–20 (GMT –06:00)
　 LF22–22 (GMT –05:00)
　 LF24–24 (GMT –04:00)
　 LF26–26 (GMT –03:00)
　 LF28–28 (GMT –02:00)
　 LF30–30 (GMT –01:00) - time zone GMT–1
　 LF32–32 (GMT +00:00) -Greenwich
　 LF34–34 (GMT +01:00) - time zone GMT+1
　 LF36–36 (GMT +02:00)
　 LF38–38(GMT +03:00)
　 LF40–40 (GMT +04:00)
　 LF42–42(GMT +05:00)
　 LF44–44 (GMT +06:00)
　 LF46–46(GMT +07:00)
　 LF48–48 (GMT +08:00)
　 LF50–50 (GMT +09:00)
　 LF52–52 (GMT +10:00)
　 LF54–54 (GMT +11:00)

　 LF56–56 (GMT +12:00) - time zone GMT+12
1.1.3 DAYLT (Daylight Saving Time)
1. Description
This parameter is not temporarily used.
If the daylight saving time is used, the BTS sets the parameter to 1. Otherwise, this parameter is 0.
The Qualcomm chips realize the daylight saving time through modifying LTM_OFF when
necessary. For example, if the daylight saving time is used at time zone GMT+ 8:00, the DST
time is one hour earlier than the actual time, that is, LTM_OFF is set to 50, namely, the time zone
GMT+9:00.
1.1.4 PRAT (Paging Channel Rate)
1. Description
This parameter indicates the paging channel rate. If you specify a value for this parameter, you
must also specify the paging channel power.
For details, see "PCHGAIN (Paging Channel Gain)" in Chapter 2 "Channel Parameters."
2. Type
Um interface parameter, sent in the SCHM.
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD SCHM
4. Range and Unit
　 BPS9600 - 9600 bit/s
　 BPS4800 - 4800 bit/s

BPS9600
6. Setting Tradeoff
This parameter is determined based on the capacity of the paging channel and the requirement for
forward link capacity.
If the value of this parameter is 9600 bit/s, the capacity of the paging channel increases at the
expense of the bandwidth of forward link.

If the value of this parameter is 4800 bit/s, the capacity of the paging channel is reduced, but the
capacity of the forward link increases.

7. Remarks
When the PICH power increases, the paging channel rate is decreased to reduce the power
consumption of the paging channel and the effect on forward capacity of the system.
The capacity of the paging channel must meet the condition. For the precautions of the operation,
see the related operational guide.
1.1.5 CDMABSN (CDMA Channel No.)
1. Description
This parameter indicates the CDMA channel number that corresponds to the frequency used by
the carrier and used by IS-95 MSs.

2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD SCHM
4. Range and Unit
0–2047
This parameter is configured based on channel number of the carrier used by IS-95 MSs.
If the channel numbers used by IS-95 and IS-2000 MSs are not specified, any channel number of
the carrier under the sector is acceptable.

6. Setting Tradeoff
None
7. Remarks
This parameter determines the CDMA center frequency and BAND_CLASS. On the Airbridge
maintenance system, the parameter is CDMABSN.
1.1.6 EXTCDMABSN (Extended CDMA Channel No.)
1. Description
This parameter indicates the CDMA channel number that corresponding to the frequency used by
the carrier and used by IS-2000 MSs.

2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD SCHM: SUBITEM=CRR_CLASS;
4. Range and Unit
0–2047
This parameter is configured based on the carrier frequency used by IS-2000 MSs.
If the channel numbers used by IS-95 and IS-2000 MSs are not specified, any carrier frequency
under the sector is acceptable.

6. Setting Tradeoff
None
7. Remarks
This parameter determines the CDMA center frequency and BAND_CLASS.
1.2 Paging Channel Parameters
1.2.1 PAGECHAN (Paging Channel Number)
1. Description
In the current version, the maintenance console command line does not contain any mapping
identifier of this parameter.When a carrier is added to the BSC, the carrier automatically obtains a
primary PCH. To add other PCHs to this carrier, run the ADD PCH command.
2. Type
Um interface parameter, sent in the SPM.
3. Command Name
Modify: ADD PCH / RMV PCH
Query: LST CMFINF: CMFINF=PCH;
4 Range and Unit
1～7
1
6. Setting Tradeoff
You should set the value of this parameter based on the PCH capacity. Generally, the parameter is
set to 1. When half-rate PCH is used and the PCH capacity becomes insufficient, change the
half-rate PCH to full-rate PCH first. When the full-rate PCH still cannot meet the requirement on
capacity, add PCHs. PCHs occupy code resources, which in turn affects the SCH assignment.
7. Remarks
None
1.2.2 MAXTSPRIDX (Max Slot Cycle Index)
1. Description
This parameter indicates the maximum cycle index in slotted mode of the paging channel. The
timeslot cycle = 1.28 x 2 MAXTSPRIDX.
For a specific MS, the slot cycle index is the smaller one between the slot cycle set in the MS and
the maximum slot cycle index allowed by the BSS.

2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD SPM
Query: LST SYSMSGPARA: CCMINF=SPM;
4 Range and Unit
0–7
1
6. Setting Tradeoff
When the value of this parameter is small, the call setup delay is reduced, but the MS consumes
more power and the standby time is shortened.
When the value of this parameter is large, the call setup delay is longer, but the MS consumes less
power.
If CCHINFOINCL is 1, the BTS must contain the field. Otherwise, the BTS does not contain the
field.
7. Remarks
The setting of the timeslot cycle must work with the time interval when the MSC delivers the
paging. For example, if the maximum paging cycle index is 2, the timeslot cycle is 5.12s, the time
interval between the MSC delivers the paging is 5s, so some paging cannot be monitored by the
MS and the paging success rate of the BSC is reduced.
Most vendors such as Motorola set the parameter to 2. The time interval between the MSC
delivers the paging is greater than 1.28 x 2 MAXTSPRIDX, such as 7s.
1.2.3 MAXALTSRV (Max. Number of Alternative Service Options)
1. Description
This parameter specifies the maximum number of alternative service options contained in the
origination message and paging response message.
2 Type
Um interface parameter, sent in the ESPM.

3. Command Name
Modify: MOD ESPM
Query: LST SYSMSGPARA: CCMINF=ESPM;
4. Range and Unit
0–7
1
6. Setting Tradeoff
None
7. Remarks
None
1.2.4 RESELINCL (System Reselection Parameters Included Indicator)
1. Description
If the system reselection parameters are included in the message, the value of this parameter is 1.
Otherwise, the value is 0.

2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD ESPM
4. Range and Unit
YES/NO
NO
6. Setting Tradeoff
None
7. Remarks
None
1.2.5 BCGPSAUG (Broadcast GPS Assist Indicator)
1. Description
This parameter specifies whether the broadcast GPS assist is supported. If the broadcast GPS
assist capability is supported, the value of this parameter is 1. Otherwise, the value is 0.
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD ESPM
4. Range and Unit
YES/NO
NO
6. Setting Tradeoff
None
7. Remarks
None
1.2.6 QPCHSPT (QPCH Support Indicator)
1. Description
This parameter is set indirectly based on QPCHNUM (see section 2.5).
If the value of QPCHNUM is 0, the QPCHSPT is 0. Otherwise, QPCHSPT is 1.

If quick paging channels must be added, the MSC must support them and the BSC must also
configure multiple tables.

2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD QPCH
Query: LST SYSMSGPARA: CCMINF=QPCH;
4. Range and Unit
YES/NO
Yes
6. Setting Tradeoff
If the quick paging channel must be supported, this parameter is set to YES.
7. Remarks
When QPCH is disabled, the MS monitors the paging channel in the cycle of 1.28 x 2max_cycle_slot
seconds if it uses the slot mode. When QPCH is enabled, the MS monitors the quick paging
channel in the same cycle. The MS monitors only one bit on the quick paging channel and checks
whether there is a page for itself. If there is, the MS tunes to the paging channel at the next paging
channel slot. If QPCH is disabled, the MS monitors the paging channel for a period of 80ms. Thus,
when QPCH is enabled, the MS can save its battery and extend its standby time.
For details about version limitation and notice for quick paging channel and how to check
whether the MS is monitoring the quick paging channel, refer to the Operation guide of CDMA
Quick Paging Channel.
Some kinds of terminals do not support the quick paging channel by default and need to be set
manually. For Samsung SCH-X130: HOME, 0, 9720, 7 security, 3 Q-Paging are to set the
attribute of enabling or disabling the quick paging channel.
1.2.7 SDBSPT (SDB Support Indicator)
1. Description
This parameter specifies whether the short data burst (SDB) is supported.
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD ESPM
4. Range and Unit
YES/NO
NO
6. Setting Tradeoff
If the SDB can be sent on common channel, this parameter is set to YES. Otherwise, the value is
NO.
7. Remarks
None
1.2.8 ECTHRS (Pilot Min. Power Threshold)
1. Description
This parameter indicates the pilot minimum receiving power threshold in the ESPM.
It is valid only when the value of RESELINCL is 1.
If Rx +10 log10 (PS) < EC_THRESH - 115, the reselection conditions of power threshold are
satisfied.
For further descriptions, see section 8.2.

2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD ESPM
4. Range and Unit
0–31
31
6. Setting Tradeoff
If the value of RESELINCL is NO, the parameters are not used for reselection.
If the reselection function is enabled, that is, RESELINCL is set to YES, then the ECTHRS is
counted based on actual conditions.

7. Remarks
If RESELECT_INCLUDE is set to YES and the mobile station supports more than one
operating mode (such as CDMA and analog) or the Remaining Set/Neighbor Set contains pilots
on frequencies different from the current frequency, the system reselection is implemented if the
following are true:
　 RESELECT_INCLUDED = 1 ( 1)
　 –20 x log10 (Ec/Io) > EC_IO_THRESH ( 2)
　 Pilot_power < EC_THRESH - 115 ( 3)
The mobile station enters the system determination substate of the MS initialization state.
8. Description of Formula (2):
The inequation means the pilot strength of the active set is below some thresholds. Generally, the
pilot strength of PN1, such as –10 dB, means 10 x log10 (Ec/Io) = –10 dB. The unit of
EC_IO_THRESH is –0.5 dB, so the real Ec/Io is –EC_IO_THRESH/2. Inequation (2) which
means 10 x log10 (Ec/Io) < - EC_IO_THRESH/2.
If EC_IO_THRESH is set to 20, inequation (2) is satisfied when the pilot strength of the active
set is below –10 dB.
9. Description of Formula (3):
The inequation means the pilot power is below some thresholds.
pilot_power (dBm/1.23 MHz) = 10 x log10 (PS) (dB) + RX (dBm/1.23 MHz)
10 x log10 (PS) is the pilot strength of the active set, and RX is the mean input power.
Thus, inequation (3) equals 10 x log10 (PS) (dB) + RX (dBm/1.23 MHz) < EC_THRESH - 115
- 115 is an offset of EC_THRESH.
If the pilot strength of the active set is –5 dB and Rx is –85 dBm, pilot_power is –90 dBm. If EC
_THRESH is set to 30, inequation (3) is satisfied when (EC_THRESH - 115) is –85 dBm.
1.2.9 ECIOTHRS (Pilot Min EC/IO Threshold)
1. Description
This parameter indicates the pilot minimum EC/IO threshold in the ESPM.
The parameter is valid only when the value of RESELINCL is 1.

If –20 x log10 (Ec/Io) > EC_IO_THRESH, the reselection conditions of Ec/Io are satisfied. For
further descriptions, see section 1.2.7 "ECTHRS (Pilot Min. Power Threshold)".
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD ESPM

4. Range and Unit
0–31
20
6.Setting Tradeoff
If RESELLINCL is set to NO by default, the parameter is not used for reselection.
If the reselection function is enabled, that is, RESELINCL is set to YES, and ECIOTHRS is
calculated based on actual conditions.

7. Remarks
None
1.2.10 BASELAT (Base Station Latitude)
1. Description
This parameter indicates the base station latitude, in the mode of ± degree, minute, and second.
Here, "+" indicates the east longitude or north latitude and "–"indicates the west longitude or
south latitude. The second is in a unit of 0.25.

2. Type
3.Command Name
Modify: MOD CELL

4. Range and Unit
Latitude range
5.Recommended Value
The value is set based on base station latitude.

6. Setting Tradeoff
The base station latitude must be accurate because the missing neighbor detection of existing
version must use the base station longitude. If the base station latitude is inaccurate, the function
should be disabled.
7.Remarks
None
1.2.11 BASELONG (Base Station Longitude)
1. Description
This parameter indicates the base station longitude, in the mode of ± degree, minute, and second.
Here, "+" indicates the east longitude or north latitude and "–"indicates the west longitude or
south latitude. The second is in a unit of 0.25.

2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD CELL

4. Range and Unit
Longitude range
The value is set based on base station longitude.
6. Setting Tradeoff
The base station longitude must be accurate because the missing neighbor detection of existing
version must use the base station longitude. If the base station longitude is inaccurate, the
function must be disabled.
7. Remarks
None
1.2.12 DELFORTMSI (Delete Foreign TMSI)
1. Description
The BSC does not support the TMSI currently. This parameter indicates whether to delete the
TMSI of an MS assigned in the TMSI ZONE. If the value of this parameter is 1, the TMSI of an
MS is removed.
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD ESPM
4. Range and Unit
YES/NO
YES
6.Setting Tradeoff
None
7. Remarks
None
1.2.13 USE_TMSI
1. Description
The current version does not support the TMSI.This parameter indicates whether to use the TMSI.
The BTS sets the value of this parameter based on the MSID type used by the MS on the access
channel.
Preferential MSID types
USE_TMSI (bin) PREF_MSID_TYPE Description

(bin)
0 '00' IMSI_S and ESN
0 '10' IMSI
0 '11' IMSI and ESN
1 '10' TMSI (when valid TMSI is assigned)
IMSI (when TMSI is not assigned)
1 '11' TMSI (when valid TMSI is assigned)
IMSI and ESN (when TMSI is not
assigned)
Other values are reserved.
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify:MOD A41SPM
Query: LST SYSMSGPARA: CCMINF=A41SPM;
4. Range and Unit

YES/NO
NO
6. Setting Tradeoff
None
7. Remarks
The maintenance console command line does not cover this parameter.
1.2.14 PMSIDTP (Preferred ACH MS ID Type)
1. Description
This parameter indicates the MS ID of the preferred access channel. The IMSI and ESN identify
the MS.
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD ESPM
4. Range and Unit
0–3
3
6. Setting Tradeoff
None
7. Remarks
None
1.2.15 BCAST_MODE( Broadcast Mode)
1. Description
This parameter specifies the broadcast mode of the paging channel (options: multi-timeslot and
periodical broadcast). When the MS is operating in slotted mode and monitoring the paging
channel, the BTS must send the broadcast message by using the multi-timeslot mode or broadcast
mode.
Currently, the BSS only supports the multi-timeslot mode, and the broadcast mode is not
supported.
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD PCH
4. Range and Unit
MSLOT for MULTI-TIMESLOT
PRDC:for PERIODICAL BROADCAST

MSLOT
6. Setting Tradeoff
None
7. Remarks
When using the multi-timeslot mode, the BTS must send the broadcast message in sufficient
paging slots so that the message can be received by an MS which is operating in slotted mode. For
example, the BTS may send the broadcast message in M successive paging slots where M is the
number of slots in a maximum paging cycle.
To deliver a broadcast message by using the periodical broadcast mode, the BTS must perform as
follows:
z If the number and size of the broadcast messages waiting to be sent can be sent in a single
slot, the BTS should send the broadcast messages in the first slot of the next broadcast paging
cycle.
z If there is a single broadcast message waiting to be sent, the BTS should send the broadcast
message at the beginning of the first slot of the next broadcast paging cycle.
z Otherwise, the BTS should contain a broadcast page for each broadcast message to be sent,
in a General Page message that is sent in the first slot of the next broadcast paging cycle. Then,
the BTS sends the related broadcast messages in the paging slots.
The broadcast page is an indication, which specifies the timeslot when the broadcast message is
sent. According to the burst type and broadcast address, the MS judges whether it should receive
the broadcast page related message. The broadcast message is the message per se, it contains the
data content.
1.2.16 BCIDX (Broadcast Slot Cycle Index)
1. Description
If the periodic broadcast paging is allowed, the value of this parameter is 1–7 to identify
broadcast slot cycle index. If the periodic broadcast paging is prohibited, the value of this
parameter is 0. Broadcast period = 1.28 x 2^ i + 0.24.

2. Type
Um interface parameter, sent in the ESPM/MCRRPM.
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD ESPM
4. Range and Unit
0–7
0 indicates the periodic broadcast paging is prohibited.

0
6. Setting Tradeoff
None
7. Remarks
The function is similar to that of MAXTSPRIDX (Max Slot Cycle Index), but used for the
broadcast message such as short messages. For common control channel, the broadcast paging
cycle index is received through the MC RR message, and the broadcast cycle = 1.28 x 2i + 0.24.
1.2.17 IMSITSPT (IMSI_T Support Indicator)
1. Description
This parameter is not used currently. If the value of this parameter is YES, 15-digits IMSI_T is
supported.
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD ESPM
4. Range and Unit
YES/NO
NO
6.Setting Tradeoff
None
7. Remarks
None
1.2.18 PZNID (Data Packet Zone Indicator)
1. Description
This parameter indicates the data packet zone ID of a cell.
If the packet data service is supported, the value of this parameter is non-0. Otherwise, the value
is 0.
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD CELL
Query: LST CELL
4. Range and Unit
0–255
It is set based on actual conditions.
6.Setting Tradeoff
None
7. Remarks
None
1.2.19 RESCAN (Rescan Indicator)
1. Description
If this parameter is set to YES, the MS needs to reselect the system when receiving the message
(SPM). If after rescanning, the MS still monitors this sector carrier and receives the message
(SPM) from the paging channel, it repeats the rescan procedure. The parameter is inherited from
the AMPS system. Upon receiving the message, the MS re-initializes and reselects the system.
It is effective only when the contents of the sync channel message change.
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD SPM
4. Range and Unit
YES/NO
NO
6. Setting Tradeoff
None
7. Remarks
None
1.2.20 RCQPCHSELINCL (RC and QPCH Selection Included Indicator)
1. Description
This parameter indicates the RC and QPCH selection included the flag.
If there are the FREQNUM (Number of CDMA Frequency) of RCQPCHCAPIND (RC and
QPCH Capacity Indicator), the BTS sets the value of this parameter to 1. Otherwise, the value of
this parameter is 0.
If QPCH is used, the value of this parameter must be set to 1.

2. Type
Um interface parameter, sent in the ECCLM.
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD ECCLM: SUBITEM=SCT_CLASS,RCQPCHSRCH=YES;
Query: LST SYSMSGPARA: CCMINF=ECCLM;
4. Range and Unit
YES/NO
YES
6. Setting Tradeoff
None
7. Remarks
None
1.2.21 RCQPCHSRCH (Search RC_QPCH Channel Indicator)
1. Description
This parameter indicates the RC and QPCH hash indicator flag.
If the value of RCQPCHSELINCL is 1, the BTS must include this field. Otherwise, the BTS
cannot include this field.
If CDMAFREQ is included in the HASH list of the MS whose RC is greater than 2 or the MS
which supports the quick paging, the BTS must set this field to 1. Otherwise, the value of this
field is 0.
When extended CDMA channel list messages are sent on the broadcast control channel and
CDMAFREQ is included in the HASH list of the MS which supports the quick paging, the BTS
must set this field to 1.

2. Type
Um interface parameter, sent in the ECCLM.
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD ECCLM
Query: LST SYSMSGPARA: CCMINF=ECCLM;
4. Range and Unit
YES/NO
YES
6. Setting Tradeoff
None
7. Remarks
None
1.3 Access Channel Messages
1.3.1 PWRCSTEP (Access Power Increment)
1. Description
When an MS is probing for access, the power for the next probe must increase if the previous one
fails, that is, the power between two neighbor access probes must increase.
Tx power used for MS access = Access attempts x power Up step
The value varies with radio environments. If the radio environments are good, such as in open
areas, the step can be small. The MS access power is stable.
After INITPWR and NOMPWR are set, the power for the first probe is less than the required
access power. The MS can access the system after two or three access probes through several
small power UP steps. The reverse Tx power is minimized and the interference to the system is
also the smallest. Otherwise, the power Up step must increase.

2. Type
Um interface parameter, sent in the APM.
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD APM
Query: LST SYSMSGPARA: CCMINF=APM;
4. Range and Unit
0–7
Unit: dB
4
6. Setting Tradeoff
If the value of this parameter is too large, the reverse Tx power may be too large and the reverse
link interference increases. If the value of this parameter is too small, the MS accesses the system
after multiple access probes. Two or three access probes are the best.
During the actual application, a test is conducted under the BTS to judge whether the open loop
power control parameters are set properly. If the MS accesses the system after multiple access
probes, the parameters may be set improperly, so the parameters must be modified.
7. Remarks
The value of this parameter cannot be greater than 5.
1.3.2 NUMSTEP (Number of Access Probes)
1. Description
This parameter specifies access probes allowed for each access probe sequence. The number of
allowed access probes is NUM_STEP + 1.

2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD APM
4. Range and Unit
0–15, that is, each access sequence has 1–16 access probes.
5
6. Setting Tradeoff
The greater the value of this parameter, the easier an access probe sequence is accessed. The
reverse link interference may increase because the access failure may be also caused by the
collision. If the access fails, the interval of call attempts is getting longer. The NUMSTEP,
PWRSTEP, and INITPWR determine the access performance.

7. Remarks
The PWRSTEP and NUMSTEP must be balanced. If the value of PWRSTEP is small, the
value of NUMSTEP must be great. If the value of PWRSTEP is great, the value of NUMSTEP
must be small.
1.3.3 PSIST09 (Persistence Value for Access Overload Classes 0–9)
1. Description
The persistence value for access overload classes 0–9 of common calls determines the threshold
P for persistent detection, and the access attempt must pass persistent detection. For details, see
IS95A-C6 protocols.
In each slot after the delayed RS, based on the P, the MS performs the pseudo random persistent
detection. (There is an RP ranging from 0 to 1 in each slot. If the RP is less than P, the persistent
detection is passed.) If the persistent detection is passed, the first probe of the access sequence is
sent in the slot. Otherwise, the access probe sequence is detected in next slot. If P = 0, the access
attempt fails.
When the ACH request is not triggered by the MS registration and message transmission, P is
counted as follows:
2. Type
Um interface parameter, sent in the APM/EAPM.
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD APM
4. Range and Unit
0–63
0
6. Setting Tradeoff
If the value of this parameter is 0 and the delay is 0, the MS accesses immediately the system
when it wants to access the system.
When the system load is too heavy, the value of this group of parameters increase, the access
attempt delay is getting longer and the collision probability is reduced.

7. Remarks
None
1.3.4 PSIST10~ PSIST15 (Persistence Value for Access Overload Classes

10–15)
1. Description
If an MS with access overload classes 10–15, is permitted to send request in the ACH, the BTS
sets this parameter to the persistence value used.
For details, see section 1.3.3 "PSIST09 (Persistence Value for Access Overload Classes 0–9)."
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD APM
4. Range and Unit
0–7
0
6. Setting Tradeoff
If an MS wants to access the system, it immediately accesses the system.
When the system load is too heavy, to keep the access speed of emergency calls access, the group
of parameters for emergency calls cannot be changed.

7. Remarks
None
1.3.5 MSGPSIST (Persistence Modifier for Message Transmission)
1. Description
This parameter is the persistence modifier sent by the access probe message. For details, see
section 1.3.3 "PSIST09 (Persistence Value for Access Overload Classes 0–9)."
During the access probe of message transmission, P x 2 -MSG_PSIST is compared with the RP.
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD APM
4. Range and Unit
0–7
0
6. Setting Tradeoff
Set the parameter to 0. If an MS wants to access the system, it immediately accesses the system.
7. Remarks
None
1.3.6 REGPSIST (Persistence Modifier for Registration)
1. Description
This parameter is the persistence modifier in the access attempt message during the registration.
It is not the registration that responds to the request order. For details, see section 1.3.3 "PSIST09
(Persistence Value for Access Overload Classes 0–9)."
During the access attempt for message transmission, P x 2 -REG_PSIST is compared with the RP.
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD APM
4. Range and Unit
0–7
0
6. Setting Tradeoff
If the value of this parameter is 0 and the delay is 0, the MS immediately accesses the system if it
wants to.
7. Remarks
None
1.3.7 PRBPNRAN (Time Randomization for ACH Probes)
1. Description
This parameter counts the pseudo noise code random delay. During an access attempt, the
accurate transmission time of the CH is determined by the pseudo noise code random delay. The
transmission time is the RN times of pseudo noise code chip. The RN can be counted based on the
HASH functions and ranges from 0 to 2 x PROBE_PN_RAN - 1 PN chip.

2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD APM
4. Range and Unit
0–9
0
6. Setting Tradeoff
When the reverse load is heavy, the value of this parameter can be great and the access collision
probability is reduced.
7. Remarks
None
1.3.8 ACCTMO (Acknowledgement Timeout)
1. Description
This parameter indicates the access probe acknowledgment timeout. If an MS does not receive
the response from the BTS after (2 + ACC_TMO) x 80ms, it is regarded that the BTS does not
receive the ACH message. The time between the access and the acknowledgment is about 350ms,
so the value of this parameter is 3.

2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD APM

4. Range and Unit
0–15, in a unit of 80ms.

3
6. Setting Tradeoff
If the value of this parameter is too small, the MS sends the access probe before the receiving the
acknowledgment from the BTS, and the ACH load and collision probability increase. The reverse
link interference also increases.
If the value of this parameter is too great, the access takes longer time when the access attempt
requires multiple probes.

7. Remarks
None
1.3.9 PRBBKOFF (ACH Probe Backoff Range)
1. Description
This parameter specifies the maximum delay for the access probe in the access sequence.
When the multiplexing sub-layer of the common channel sends all access probes in an access
sequence on the R-ACH which is corresponding to the current F-PCH, the next access probe is
sent after an additional delay RT. The RT ranges from 0 to 1+ PROBE_BKOFF.
If the multiplexing sub-layer of the common channel sends access probes on the R-ACH that is
corresponding to the current F-PCH, the next access probe is also sent after an additional delay
RT. The RT ranges from 0 to 1 + PROBE_BKOFF.

2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD APM
4. Range and Unit
0–15 (a maximum of 1–16 time slots)

3 (a maximum of four time slots)
6. Setting Tradeoff
If the value of this parameter is too great, the MS access is delayed when there are many access
attempt probes.
If the value of this parameter is too small, the collision probability increases when the system load
is heavy.
If the system load is small, the value can be small. If the system load is heavy, the value can be
great.
7. Remarks
None
1.3.10 BKOFF (ACH Probe Sequence Backoff Range)
1. Description
This parameter indicates the backoff range of the ACH probe sequence. The access probe
sequence (except the first) has a sequence delay RS. The RS ranges from 0 to 1+ BKOFF.
BKOFF = Maximum delay for access probe in the access sequence - 1

2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD APM
4. Range and Unit
0–15 (a maximum of 1–16 timeslots)

3 (a maximum of four timeslots)
6. Setting Tradeoff
If the value of this parameter is too great, the collision probability is reduced in the case of high
reverse load, but the MS access is delayed.

7. Remarks
None
1.3.11 MAXREQSEQ (Max Number of Probe Sequences for an ACH Request)
1. Description
This parameter indicates the maximum number of access probe sequences for an ACH request
(such as origination message). If the access probe sequence (except the first) has a sequence delay
RS, the RS ranges from 0 to BKOFF.

2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD APM
4. Range and Unit
1–15
3
6. Setting Tradeoff
If the value of this parameter is too great, the access success rate increases and the ACH capacity
is reduced.
If the value of this parameter is too small, such as 1, the sequences cannot be resent.
The radio environments are changeable. The radio environments may get better in the second
sequence if the first access fails. Therefore, the value of this parameter must be no smaller than 2.
7. Remarks
None
1.3.12 MAXRSPSEQ (Max. Number of Probe Sequences for an ACH

Response)
1. Description
This parameter indicates the maximum number of access probe sequences for an ACH response
(such as a paging response). If the access probe sequence (except the first) has a sequence delay
RS, the RS ranges from 0 to BKOFF.

2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD APM

4. Range and Unit
1–15
3
6. Setting Tradeoff
The same as that of MAXREQSEQ
7. Remarks
None
1.3.13 PSISTEMGINCL (Emergency Call Persistence Value Included)
1. Description
This parameter indicates the emergency call persistence flag and specifies whether to allow the
MSs with overload classes 0–9 for persistence value of access attempts during emergency calls.
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD APM
4. Range and Unit
YES/NO
NO
6. Setting Tradeoff
None
7. Remarks
None
1.3.14 PSISTEMG (Emergency Call Persistence Values for Access Overload

Classes 0–9)
1. Description
This parameter indicates the persistence value for access overload classes 0–9 when the MS
makes emergency calls. If the value of PSISTEMGINCL is 0, this parameter is invalid.

When the value of PSISTEMGINCL is 1 and the MSs with access overload classes 0–9 can send
emergency calls request on the ACH, the value of this parameter is 0.
If the emergency calls are forbidden, the value of this parameter is 7.

2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD APM
4. Range and Unit
0~7
0
6. Setting Tradeoff
None
7. Remarks
None
1.3.15 PCN (PCH No.)
1. Description
This parameter indicates the number of paging channels that are corresponding to the access
channel.
The PCN and Module ID comprise the index and the pilot ID.
2. Command Name
Modify: MOD ACH
Query: LST CMFINF: CMFINF= ACH;
3. Range and Unit
1–7
According to the number of paging channels, a record is configured for each paging channel.
5. Setting Tradeoff
None
6. Remarks
None
1.3.16 ACCNUM (Number of Access Channels)
1. Description
This parameter indicates the number of access channels related to the paging channel.
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD ACH
Query: LST CMFINF: CMFINF=ACH;
4. Range and Unit
1–32
1, that is, one access channel
6. Setting Tradeoff
None
7. Remarks
None
1.3.17 MAXLEN (Max. Message Length)
1. Description
This parameter indicates the maximum length of the access channel message.
MAXLEN = Maximum frames of each access channel message - 3

2. Type
Um interface parameter
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD ACH
4. Range and Unit
0–7, that is, 3–10 frames

4, that is seven frames
6. Setting Tradeoff
If the value of this parameter is too small, large access channel messages cannot be sent, such as
origination messages containing dialing numbers or data burst messages.
If the value of this parameter is too great, large messages can be sent but the messages may be
conflicted easily and the access channel capacity is reduced because sending the messages takes
longer time.
For example, if the value of this parameter is 3, the maximum number of frames of the access
channel message is 6. The access channel rate is 4800 bit/s, so the maximum message length is 6
x 20 x 4800/1000 = 576 bit.
The maximum length of the common access message is about100–300 bit, and some short
messages can be sent. Before the longer short messages are sent, the originating message must be
sent and a traffic channel is established.

7. Remarks
None
1.3.18 PAMLEN (Header Length)
1. Description
This parameter indicates the header length of the access channel.
PAMLEN= Maximum preamble frames of the access channel - 1

2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD ACH
4. Range and Unit
0–15, that is, 1–16 frames

3, that is, four frames
6. Setting Tradeoff
If the value of this parameter is too great, the access channel capacity is wasted. (1 + PAMLEN)
frames do not carry the message contents, so the BTS can capture the MS with fewer frames.
If the value of this parameter is too small, the BTS is hard to successfully capture the MS. Thus,
more messages of the MS are resent.

The parameter adjustment is related to the size of the search window used by the BTS to capture
access channels.
7. Remarks
The search window size has a positive relation with the number of needed preamble frames.
1.3.19 CELLMODE
1. Description
This parameter is used to set the mode of the cell. The cell of the BTS can adopt normal mode or
large mode. The cell mode affects the maximum cell radius. Under the normal mode, the
maximum cell radius of a BTS must be smaller than 125 km and greater than 0 km. Under the
large mode, the maximum cell radius cannot exceed 250 km.
2. Type
BTS internal parameter
3. Command Name
This parameter is used to set parameters about how to process the reverse codes of BTS channel
units. Parameters related to reverse code processing apply to the resource pool, that is, all such
parameters of channel units in the same resource pool must be set to the same value.
For versions earlier than the 3612V100R002B02, the command format is as follows:
SET BTSREVCHP: CPLID=0,MAXRANUM=2,MAXREARCNUM=2,

MINPAMSZ=3, ENSCHWADJ=Enable, CFM95=6, CFM2K=8
For the 3612V100R002B02 and later releases, you can set parameters about reverse codes in the
ini file.
4. Range and Unit
0~1
None
6. Setting Tradeoff
None
7. Remarks
The BTS 3612V100R002B02 and later releases use this parameter. Consider the cell radius when
you set this parameter.The normal cell mode supports six sectors and the large cell mode supports
three sectors.
1.3.20 MAXCELLR (Max. Cell Radius)
1. Description
This parameter indicates the maximum cell radius, in a unit of kilometer.
The MS can work normally within the radius. From the aspect of geography, the value of this
parameter is the longest distance covered by the BTS (that is, from the place where the BTS is
located to the coverage border). The parameter sets the search window size of the reverse
common channel. For example, maxcellr = 39, that is, the cell radius is 39 km. The kilometer
(diameter) is converted into chips, that is, 5 x 64 chips. This is the search window size of the
common channel. The center of the search window is half of the common search window.
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: SET C(M)BTSSECTORPARA: SECTORTP=CDMA1X, MAXCELLR=40;
Query: DSP CBTSCFG: CFGID=CBTSCDMA1XCHIPPARA;
4. Range and Unit
Cell mode Parameter range (chips) Maximum cell radius (km)
Normal cell mode 0–1024 125
Macro cell mode 0–2048 250
Operating Range:
Cell mode Operating range of maximum cell radius (km)
Normal cell mode 0–125
Macro cell mode 126–184 and 217–250
40
6. Setting Tradeoff
None
7. Remarks
None
1.3.21 MXRANUM (Maximum Number of Reverse Access Channel)
1. Description
This parameter indicates the maximum number of RACHs that the BT can search.
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: SET C(M)BTSCDMA1XCHIPPARA
Query: DSP C(M)BTSCFG: CFGID=CBTSCDMA1XCHIPPARA;
4. Range and Unit
1–32
2
6. Setting Tradeoff
None
7. Remarks
If the value of this parameter is too great, the search capacity of the traffic channel is affected. If
the value of this parameter is too small, the access success rate of the access channel is affected.
1.3.22 MAXREARCNUM (Maximum Number of R-EACHs and R-CCCHs)
1. Description
This parameter indicates the maximum search capacity of R-EACHs and R-CCCHs. The
meaning of this parameter is the same as that of the MAXRANUM.
3. Command Name
This parameter is used to set parameters about how to process the reverse codes of BTS channel
units. Parameters related with reverse code processing apply to the resource pool, that is, all such
parameters of channel units in the same resource pool must be set to the same value.
For versions earlier than the 3612V100R002B02, the command format is as follows:
SET BTSREVCHP：CPLID=0,MAXRANUM=2,MAXREARCNUM=2,
MINPAMSZ=3, ENSCHWADJ=Enable, CFM95=6, CFM2K=8
For the 3612V100R002B02, you can set parameters about reverse codes in the ini file.
The value of this parameter depends on the search scope. The current version does not support the
R-EACH. You can set the value of this parameter to 1.

6. Setting Tradeoff
None
7.Remarks
If the value of this parameter is set too great, the search capacity of TCHs is affected; if the value
is set too small, the access success rate of access channels is affected.Considering the R-FCH
RC3, R-FCH RC4, R-SCH, or R-DCCH, the resources required by R-EACHs depend on many
factors. In addition, the R-EACH searcher demands more resources than TCHs. Therefore, you
should restrict the number of IS-2000 TCHs and R-EACHs. Currently, the BTS does not adopt
these two channels.
1.3.23 MNPMSZ (Minimum Length of Access Channel Preamble)
1. Description
This parameter indicates the length of the ACH access preamble frame (PAM_SZ + 1).
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: SET C(M)BTSCDMA1XCHIPPARA
Query: DSP C(M)BTSCFG: CFGID=CBTSSECTORPARA;
4. Range and Unit
0–15
3
6. Setting Tradeoff
None
7. Remarks
If the value of this parameter is too great, the access speed is affected.
If the value of this parameter is too small, the access success rate is affected.
1.3.24 MAXSCHPAS (Max. Search Times of R-ACH, R-EACH, and R-CCCH)
1. Description
This parameter indicates the maximum search times of the preambles of R-ACH, R-EACH, and
R-CCCH.
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: SET C(M)BTSSECTORPARA: SECTORTP=CDMA1X;
4. Range and Unit
1–4
3
6. Setting Tradeoff
If the value of this parameter is too great, the preambles of R-ACH, R-EACH, and R-CCCH are
searched unnecessarily for many times. As a result, there are less searcher resources obtained
from other channels and the multi-path may be reported falsely. If the value of this parameter is
too small, some preambles may be missing.
1.3.25 SCHSOS (Initial Offset of Reverse Common Channel Searcher)
1. Description
This parameter indicates the initial offset of the reverse common channel searcher.
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: SET CBTSSECTORPARA: SECTORTP=CDMA1X;
4. Range and Unit
0–16376
0
6. Setting Tradeoff
None
7. Remarks
Actually, if the value of this parameter is set based on reverse delay of the system, the search
efficiency improves. This parameter eliminates the delay caused by the distance from the antenna
to the optical port.

1.4 Registration Parameters
1.4.1 REGZN (Registration Zone)
1. Description
This parameter indicates the registration zone code of the sector.
The REGZN, SID, and NID determine a unique CDMA registration zone. Based on registration
zone, the parameter applies to the registration. It is assigned according to actual conditions during
the network planning. For details, see IS2000-5(2.6.5.1.5).

2. Type
Um interface parameter, sent in the SPM/MSRM.
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD SPM
4. Range and Unit
0x000–0xFFF (0–4095)
0 means that if the registration is based on registration zone, the registration zone is assigned
based on registration zone.

6. Setting Tradeoff
During the setting of the registration zone, the registration zone has a positive relation with the
paging overhead. As a result, if the registration zone is large, the paging capacity is insufficient,
especially when there are many short message services.
If the registration zone is small, the system capacity increases, but the registration is extra
frequent to affect the reverse capacity. The access of the called party is difficult at the edge of the
registration zone.
7. Remarks
None
1.4.2 TOTALZN (Number of Total Registration Zones to be Retained)
1. Description
This parameter indicates the total number of registration zones. Based on registration zone, it
applies to the registration.

In a commercial network, this parameter is a basic registration method and enables the MS to
update the location and the network knows the latest location of the MS in time when it moves
from a REGZN to another REGZN. The MSC delivers the paging based on the LAC, and the
division of registration zone can be consistent with that of the LAC area.
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD SPM
4. Range and Unit
0-7
0 indicates that zone-based registration is forbidden.

1 (If the zone-based registration is used, the value of this parameter is not 0.)
6. Setting Tradeoff
If the value of this parameter is greater than 1, the frequent handoff of the MS on the border of
registration zones can be avoided, especially for the borders with serious pilot pollution.
The idle handoffs are frequent, so the MS registers the locations frequently even it is not moved.
As a result, the location cannot be updated in time, and the system fails to deliver paging
messages to the correct LAC area.
When other paging mechanisms are not used, the value of ZNTMR must be small, such as 1, if
the value of this parameter is greater than 1.

7. Remarks
After receiving a system parameter message, the MS compares the REGZN included in the
message with the ZONE stored in the ZONE_LISTS. If the ZONE_LIST has no zones, the MS
registers the location and the new zones are added to the ZONELIST.
If the parameter changes, for example, TOTALZONES decreases, or the number of zones
exceeds the number specified in the TOTALZONES because of new zones, the MS deletes the
earliest zone.
For the maintenance of ZONE_LIST, see TIA/EIA/IS-2000.5-A.

1.4.3 ZNTMR (Zone Timer Length)
1. Description
The MS saves the REGZN of the SPM in the zone list. If a message containing the REGZN is not
received within the specified time, the MS deletes the REGZN. When the zone-based registration
is used, that is, the TOTALZN value is not 0, this parameter is effective.
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD SPM
4. Range and Unit
0–7, in the unit of minute
Table 6-1 Zone Timer values
Value (in binary) Timer length (in minutes)
000 1
001 2
010 5
011 10
100 20
101 30
110 45
111 60
7
6. Setting Tradeoff
If the value of TOTALZONES is larger than 1, the value of ZNTMR can be set to a small value
(such as 1) so as to reduce the effect on the paging. If the value of TOTALZONES is 1, the effect
of this parameter can be ignored.

7. Remarks
For each REGZN stored in the ZONELIST, the MS maintains a timer. According to the timers,
the MS determines whether a system parameter message containing REGZN is received within
the time specified by the ZNTMR. If not, the MS deletes the REGZN from ZONELIST.
Note that it does not mean that the MS will originate a registration. The MS checks whether the
received SPM contains the REGZN that is not in the ZONELIST to determine a zone-based
registration. Using the timers, the MS can also find out the earliest REGZN.
In short, after receiving a system parameter message, the MS stores the REGZN. If the REGZN is
contained in the ZONELIST, the corresponding timer is disabled.
If other REGZNs (different from received REGZNs) in the ZONELIST have no activated timers,
the MS enables a timer with the initial length of ZNTMR.
For details, see section 2.6.5.5.4.3 Candidate Frequency Periodic Search in
TIA/EIA/IS-2000.5-A.
1.4.4 MSID (Multiple SID Storage Indicator)
1. Description
This parameter determines whether to allow an MS to store the SID_NID_LIST containing
different SIDs.
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD SPM
4. Range and Unit
YES/NO
NO
6. Setting Tradeoff
None
7. Remarks
None
1.4.5 MNID (Multiple NID Storage Indicator)
1. Description
This parameter determines whether to allow an MS to save the SID_NID_LIST that contains the
same SID but different NIDs.

2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD SPM
4. Range and Unit
YES/NO
NO
6. Setting Tradeoff
None
7. Remarks
None
1.4.6 HOMEREG (Home Registration Indicator)
1. Description
This parameter determines whether to allow a non-roaming MS to register with the network. If
the value of this parameter is 1 and MOB_TERM_HOME=1, the MS can register automatically.
The auto registration can be MS power-on auto registration, MS power-off auto registration,
time-based registration, zone-based registration, or distance-based registration.

2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD SPM
4. Range and Unit
YES/NO
YES
6. Setting Tradeoff
None
7. Remarks
None
1.4.7 FORSIDREG (SID Roamer Registration Indicator)
1. Description
This parameter determines whether to allow the MS from other SIDs to register with the network.
If the value of this parameter is 1 and MOB_TERM_FOR_SID=1, the MS can register
automatically. The auto registration can be MS power-on auto registration, MS power-off auto
registration, time-based registration, zone-based registration, or distance-based registration.

2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD SPM
4. Range and Unit
YES/NO
YES
6. Setting Tradeoff
Determine whether to allow the MS from other SIDs according to actual conditions.
7. Remarks
None
1.4.8 FORNIDREG (NID Roamer Registration Indicator)
1. Description
This parameter determines whether to allow the MS from other NIDs to register with the network.
If the value of this parameter is 1 and MOB_TERM_FOR_NID=1, the MS can register
automatically. The auto registration can be MS power-on auto registration, MS power-off auto
registration, time-based registration, zone-based registration, or distance-based registration.

2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD SPM
4. Range and Unit
YES/NO
YES
6. Setting Tradeoff
Determine whether to allow the MS from other NIDs according to actual conditions.
7. Remarks
None
1.4.9 PWRUP (Power-up Registration Indicator)
1. Description
This parameter determines whether the MS registers automatically upon power-on and after
receiving the Overhead message. If the value of this parameter is 1, the MS registers
automatically. If the value of this parameter is 0, the MS does not register automatically.
The MS starts the power-on registration 20 seconds after it enters the IDLE state. This can avoid
excessive registrations due to frequent power-on and power-off.

2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD SPM
4. Range and Unit
YES/NO
YES
6. Setting Tradeoff
None
7. Remarks
The power-on registration must be enabled unless testing requires special setting.
1.4.10 PWRDWN (Power-down Registration Indicator)
1. Description
This parameter determines whether the MS needs to register automatically upon power-down. If
the value of this parameter is 1, the MS can register automatically. If the value of this parameter is
0, the MS cannot register automatically.
If the MS does not register in existing SID and NID, the MS does not perform power-down
registration. The MS powers down after the power-down registration.

2. Type
Um interference parameter (SPM)
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD SPM
4. Range and Unit
YES/NO
YES. The power-down registration must be enabled unless testing requires special setting.
6. Setting Tradeoff
None
7. Remarks
The MS starts the registration 20 seconds after it enters the IDLE state. This can avoid excessive
registrations due to frequent power-on and power-off.
When the timer is activated, the MS does not perform registration access attempts. The MS is
powered down after the power-down registration.
1.4.11 PRMREG (Overhead Message Parameter-Change Registration

Indicator)
1. Description
This parameter determines whether to allow auto registration when the MS connects with a new
system or when the values of the overhead message parameters stored in the MS are changed.
If the value of this parameter is 1, the registration is allowed. If the value of this parameter is 0,
the registration is not allowed.

The specified parameters set by the MS are:
z SLOT_CYCLE_INDEXp
z BTS type (SCMp)
z MOB_TERM_HOMEp/MOB_TERM_FOR_SIDp/ MOB_TERM_FOR_NIDp
z MS-supported band type, power level and radio configuration
In addition, when there are no records match the SID and NID in the SID_NID_LISTs saved by
the MS, the parameter change registration is performed. When the parameters are changed, the
MS deletes all the SID_NID_LISTs.
Huawei has no experiences on the performance impact caused by this registration and does not
know whether there are negative effects. After the parameters are changed, the MS deletes all the
SID_NID_LISTs, regardless of the permission defined by the value of HOME_REG.

2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD SPM
4. Range and Unit
YES/NO
YES
6. Setting Tradeoff
None
7. Remarks
On the Maintenance System, the parameter is PRMREG.
1.4.12 REGPRD (Timer-based Registration)
1. Description
This parameter indicates timer-based registration cycle. Registration cycle=2REG_PRD/4 * 0.08
second.
If the value of this parameter is 0, periodical registration is not performed. The registration modes
defined in the protocols must work harmoniously.

The periodical registration is performed when an MS does not update the location for a long time
and it may be deactivated by the MSC if it is still not registered. The registration of MSs that
move between the location areas is ensured through zone-based registration and parameter-based
registration.
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD SPM
4. Range and Unit
0 and 29–85
58, about half an hour
6. Setting Tradeoff
The registration cycle must be 1/4–1/3 times that of the deactivation timer configured at the MSC.
Otherwise, the MS may be deactivated by the MSC and cannot be paged.

7. Remarks
Time-based registration enables the MS to perform periodical registration and the system to
automatically remove the registration of MS that fails the power-off registration.
The MS still keeps a time-based registration timer. When the value of this timer exceeds the value
of REGPRD, the MS initiates time-based registration. When the MS powers on or moves to
other serving systems, the timer is reset automatically.
The COUNTER_ENABLED in the MS shows the status of time-registration timer. When the
value of the COUNTER_ENABLED changes from NO to YES, the timer is a pseudorandom
value that ranges from 0 to the registration cycle value.
1.4.13 REGDIST (Distance-based Registration)
1. Description
This parameter specifies the distance-based registration threshold. The MS saves the longitude
and latitude information about the last registration. If the distance with longitude and latitude
values in the Overhead message exceeds the value of REGDIST, the MS initiates a
distance-based registration.
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD SPM
4. Range and Unit
0–2047
If the value is 0, the MS does no perform distance-based registration.

0
6. Setting Tradeoff
None
7. Remarks
None
1.5 System Message Control Parameters
1.5.1 EXTNGRLST (Extended Neighbor List Message Send Indicator)
1. Description
If the extended neighbor list message is sent on the paging channel, the value of this parameter is
set to YES. Otherwise, it is set to NO. The extended neighbor list message is used in the band
class 1 rather than band class 0.
If the band class is 1, 3, or 4, and the minimum protocol revision is less than 6, the parameter is set
to YES. Otherwise, it is set to Not Send. The value of this parameter is set based on actual
networking requirements.
2. Type
3. Command Name
Query: LST SYSMSGPARA: CCMINF= SYSMSGCTRL;
4. Range and Unit
YES/NO
YES
6. Setting Tradeoff
None
7. Remarks
The parameter on the Maintenance System is EXTNBRLST.
1.5.2 EXTNBRLIST (Extended Neighbor List Message Send Indicator)
1. Description
If the Extended Neighbor List Message (ENLM) is sent on the Paging Channel, the value of this
parameter is set to YES. Otherwise, it is set to NO. The ENLM is used in BandClass 1 rather than
BandClass 0.
If the BAND_CLASS is 1, 3, or 4, and the minimum protocol revision is earlier than 6, the
parameter is set to YES. Otherwise, it is set to NO. Set the value of this parameter based on the
actual networking requirements.
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD SYSMSGCTRL
4. Range and Unit
YES/NO
NO
6. Setting Tradeoff
None
7. Remarks
None
1.5.3 GENNBRLST (General Neighbor List Message Send Indicator)
1. Description
If the general neighbor list message is sent on the paging channel, the value of this parameter is
set to YES. Otherwise, it is set to NO. The neighbor list message can be used to specify neighbor
cells of different channel numbers. If cells of different frequencies exist in the network, the
inter-frequency handoff must be performed, and the value of this parameter is set to YES.
2. Type
3. Command Name
4. Range and Unit
YES/NO
NO
YES for 450 MHz cells

6. Setting Tradeoff
None
7. Remarks
According to the protocols, GENNLST is mandatory for 450 MHz cells, and the value of this
parameter is YES.
1.5.4 GLBRDRCT (Global Service Redirection Message Send Indicator)
1. Description
If the global service redirection message is sent on the Paging Channel, the value of this
parameter is set to YES. Otherwise, it is set to NO.
After receiving the global service redirection message, the MS leaves the existing sector carrier,
and attempts to capture a new channel based on the contents in the message. The message is used
when:
z The existing carrier is being maintained.
z The existing carrier is accessed or the traffic channel is overloaded.
This message is sent only when the BTS protocol revision is 6 or higher than 6. The protocol
revision of BTS must be checked.

2. Type
3. Command Name
4. Range and Unit

YES/NO
NO
6. Setting Tradeoff
None
7. Remarks
None
1.5.5 UZID (User Zone Identification Message Send Indicator)
1. Description
This message indicates the sending of user zone identification messages, but it is not available at
present. If the user zone identification message is sent on the paging channel, the value of this
parameter is set to YES. Otherwise, the value of this parameter is set to NO.
2. Command Name
Query: LST SYSMSGPARA
3. Range and Unit
YES/NO
NO
5. Setting Tradeoff
None
6. Remarks
None
1.5.6 EXTGLBRDRCT (Extended Global Service Redirection Message Send

Indicator)
1. Description
If the extended global service redirection message is sent on the paging channel, the value of this
parameter is set to YES. Otherwise, the value of this parameter is set to NO.
This message is sent only when the BTS protocol revision is 6 or is higher than 6. The BTS
protocol revision must be checked.

2. Type
3. Command Name
4. Range and Unit
YES/NO
NO
6. Setting Tradeoff
None
7. Remarks
None
1.5.7 EXTCDMACHLST (Extended CDMA Channel List Message Send

Indicator)
1. Description
If the extended CDMA list message is sent on the paging channel, the value of this parameter is
set to YES. Otherwise, the value of this parameter is set to NO.
If the extended CDMA channel list message is sent, the IS-2000 MS uses the channel number list
HASH in the ECCLM, and the IS-95 MS uses the frequency list in the CCLM. This provides a
control mechanism to enable the IS-2000 and IS-95 MSs to use different carriers.
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD ECCLM: SUBITEM=SCT_CLASS, EXTCDMACHLST=YES;
4. Range and Unit
YES/NO
NO
6. Setting Tradeoff
None
7. Remarks
None
Chapter 2 Forward Power Distribution Parameters
2.1 Sector Carrier Gain
2.1.1 TXGAIN (RF Gain)
1. Description
This parameter specifies the attenuation.
2. Type
This parameter is a sector carrier level internal parameter.
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD CDMACH
Query: LST CDMACH

4. Range and Unit
0−24 (unit: dB)
0
6. Setting Tradeoff
The value of this parameter depends on the required power output. The recommended value
should not exceed 20 dB. The total attenuation of RF gain and power amplitude limitation
processing unit is 24 dB. Therefore, the RF gain must be less than 20 dB so that 4 dB is reserved
for the power limitation-processing unit. An external attenuator is required to obtain a lower
forward power output.

7. Remarks
Before the forward output power is changed, ensure that the RF gain is adjusted.
Forward power amplitude limitation means that the module measures digital power within
periods. If the digital power is greater than 45 dBm, the digital signal is attenuated and 45 dBm of
power can be secured. If the digital power is less than 45 dBm, the digital signal is transmitted
normally.
Figure 2-1 Forward channel
2.1.2 SCTGAIN (Baseband Gain)
1. Description
This parameter specifies the baseband gain.
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD CDMACH
Query: LST CDMACH

4. Range and Unit
0−4095
3000
6. Setting Tradeoffs
The value of this parameter depends on the required output power. The relationship between this
parameter and the received transmit power is shown in the following formula:
P = 20*log (SCTGAIN/3000) + 43 − TXGAIN (dBm)

Currently, the forward output power is changed by using TXGAIN and external attenuator,
instead of modifying the BTS gain.
Table 2-1 Relationship between sector gain and output power
Sector
Output Power (dBm)
Gain
3000 43
2500 41.4
2000 39.5
1500 37
1000 33.5
500 27.3
7. Remarks
If the output power is restricted, RF gain and sector gain are modified in sequence. When the
forward output power is modified, the RF gain is adjusted, and the sector gain should not beyond
500–3200.
2.1.3 ADJPOWER (Rated Power Adjust Parameter)
1. Description
This parameter specifies the setting of the nominal power adjustment.
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: SET CBTSRFPARA;
Query: DSP CBTSCFG: BTSID=XX, CFGID=CBTSRFPARA;

4. Range and Unit
−20 to 10 (unit: 0.5 dB)
This parameter is set to −2 in the versions earlier than the BTS V200R100C04B014SP08,
meaning that the nominal power of the BTS is 20 W. The default value is 0.
This parameter is set to 0 in the versions later than the BTS V200R100C04B014SP08, meaning
that the nominal power of the BTS is 20 W.
For details, refer to the Wireless CBSS Maintenance Department Technical Notification [2005]
No.016--Technical Notification on Reconstruction of BTS3606 Multi-Carrier Calibration Power.

None.
7. Remarks
None.
2.2 Pilot Channel Parameters
2.2.1 PLTCHGAIN (Pilot Channel Gain)
1. Description
This parameter specifies the pilot channel power and is represented by the percentage to total
power.
The forward transmit power overload threshold must be modified when the pilot channel gain is
modified. For details, refer to the Forward Basic Admission Threshold (FBASICVAL).
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD PLTCH
Query: LST CMFINF: CMFINF=PLTCH;

4. Range and Unit
−255 to 0 (unit: 0.25 dB)
−28
Actually, this parameter ranges from −63.75 dB to 0 dB, and the step length is 0.25 dB. The value
recommended by Qualcomm is −7.5 dB.
The capacity and coverage must be considered when you set the ratio of PICH power to total
sector carrier. If many transmit powers are allocated for the pilot channel, the coverage area is
larger, but the transmit power for the traffic channel is smaller and the capacity decreases. When
the PICH gain is high, forward power and reverse power must be balanced.
In densely populated areas, the cell coverage is small, the SCTGAIN is not changed, and the
PICH gain is relatively small. In this case, coverage area is ensured and the capacity increases
accordingly.
7. Remarks
To modify the PICH gain, proceed as follows:
1) Adjust the PICH gain by about 2% to 5% (modify synchronously other forward common
channel power and traffic channel-related power setting parameters to remain the ratio to the
PICH gain).
2) Check that the expected coverage areas are ensured, the uplink and downlink signal strength are
balanced, and that the traffic measurement indexes are improved (at least not deteriorated).
3) Repeat step 1) and 2) before the proper pilot power is determined.
2.3 Synchronization Channel Gain
2.3.1 SYNCHGAIN (Synchronization Channel Gain Offset)
1. Description
It indicates the offset of synchronization channel gain relative to pilot channel gain.
Synchronization Channel Gain = Pilot Channel Gain + Synchronization Channel Gain
Offset.This parameter specifies the synchronization channel gain, and dB is represented by the
percentage to the total power.

2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD SYNCH
Query: LST CMFINF: CMFINF=SYNCH;

4. Range and Unit
−200 to 55
−40(unit: 0.25dB )
Actually, this parameter ranges from −63.75 dB to 0dB, and the step length is 0.25 dB. This
parameter equals to the pilot channel gain minus 10 dB (10 dB is recommended by Qualcomm
based on the simulation result). A fixed ratio is kept, and the synchronization channel and pilot
channel have the same coverage area.
For further analysis and calculation, refer to the cdma2000 System Forward Capacity Research
Report drafted by the Coverage and Capacity Team of Radio Network Department.
7. Remarks
None.
2.4 Paging Channel Parameters
2.4.1 PCHGAIN (Paging Channel Gain Offset)
1. Description
It indicates the offset of paging channel gain relative to pilot channel gain. Paging Channel Gain
= Pilot Channel Gain + Paging Channel Gain Offset.This parameter specifies the paging channel
power and the percentage to total power are represented in dB.

2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD PCH

4. Range and Unit
−200 to 55
-6 （0.25dB）
Actually, this parameter ranges from −63.75 dB to 0dB, and the step length is 0.25 dB. The
paging channel gain is related to the paging channel power.
If the paging channel rate is 9600 bit/s, the paging channel gain equals to the pilot channel gain
minus 1.5 dB.
If the paging channel rate is 4800 bit/s, the paging channel gain equals to the pilot channel gain
minus 4.5 dB (4.5 dB is recommended by Qualcomm based on simulation result).
The paging channel rate is configured in the PRAT field of the Synchronization Channel Message
(SCHM). If PRAT is 0, the paging channel rate is 9600 bit/s. If PRAT is 1, the rate is 4800 bit/s.
If this value is too low, some MSs can capture the pilot channel, but the Eb/Nt for paging channel
demodulation is insufficient. If MSs succeed in demodulating the paging channels, the pilot
channel power is wasted.
If this value is too high, MSs can demodulate paging channel largely, but the forward capacity
decreases. Continuously sending messages on the paging channel causes continuous interference.
Consequently, the forward power used for the common channel increases, and the power used for
traffic channel decreases.

7. Remarks
To ensure power balance, the power for the pilot channel, synchronization channel, and paging
channel must be distributed based on their relationship.
2.5 Quick Paging Channel Gain
2.5.1 QPCHNUM (Number of Quick Paging Channel)
1. Description
This parameter specifies the number of quick paging channels.
According to the protocols, this parameter is set to 0 when QPCHSPT is 1. Otherwise, this
parameter is neglected.
2. Type
This parameter is an Um interface parameter and sent in the ESPM.
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD QPCH
Query: LST CMFINF: CMFINF=QPCH;

4. Range and Unit
0−3
0 (QPCH not used)
None.
7. Remarks
None.
2.5.2 QPCHRT (Quick Paging Channel Data Rate)
1. Description
This parameter specifies the data rate over the QPCH.
For the paging channel, 0 indicates 9600 bit/s. For the quick paging channel, 0 indicates 4800
bit/s).
2. Type
This parameter is a sector carrier level Um interface parameter and sent in the ESPM.
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD QPCH

4. Range and Unit
BPS4800, BPS9600
0 (4800 bit/s)
None.
7. Remarks
None.
2.5.3 PWRLEVCFG (Relative Power Level of CCI Modulation Symbol)
1. Description
This parameter specifies the transmit power relative to pilot when quick paging channel transmits
CCI modulation symbol.
If QPCH_SUPPORTED is set to 1, this parameter is set based on Table 2-2.
Table 2-2 Power offset for the quick paging channel
PWRLEVCFG PWRLEVPAGE (binary) Transmit Power Level
000 −5
001 −4
010 −3
011 −2
100 −1
101 0
110 1
111 2
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD QPCH

4. Range and Unit
0−7 (unit:-5 dB)
7
The transmit power of the quick paging channel is the balance between the forward link capacity
and the standby time of the MS.
If the transmit power of the quick paging channel is high, the forward link capacity is reduced, but
the probability of successful detection by the MS is high, thus prolonging the standby time, and
vice versa.
If the load of the sector carrier is light, the value of this parameter can be high, and vice versa.
To ensure balance between the load and the paging success rate, the parameter must be properly
set.
7. Remarks
The power offset is −5 dB, so the actual range of this parameter is −5 to 2 dB.
2.5.4 PWRLEVPAGE (Relative Power Level of PI Modulation Symbol)
1. Description
This parameter specifies the transmit power relative to pilot when quick paging channel transmits
PI modulation symbol.
If QPCHSPT is set to 1, this parameter is set based on Table 2-2.

For details, refer to PWRLEVCFG.
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD QPCH

4. Range and Unit
0–7 dB(unit:-5dB)
7 (2 dB)
The recommended value helps to high ensure paging success ratio. Thus, this parameter can be
adjusted based on actual conditions.
If the load of the sector carrier is light, the value of this parameter can be high, and vice versa.
To ensure balance between the load and the paging success rate, the parameter must be properly
set.
7. Remarks
The power offset is -5dB, so the actual range of this parameter is −5 to 2 dB.
Chapter 3 Power Estimation and Control

Parameters
3.1 Forward Slow Power Control Parameters
3.1.1 FWDMAXCHGAIN (Maximum Transmit Power Offset of Forward

Channel)
1. Description
It indicates the offset of the maximum transmission power of forward channel relative to pilot
channel gain, Maximum Transmit Power of Forward Channel = Pilot Channel Gain + Maximum
Transmit Power Offset of Forward Channel.Adjusting this parameter helps balance capacity and
quality, so this parameter is determined as required.

2. Type
It is an internal BSC parameter.
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD FSLOWPC
Query: V3R1/V3R6 - LST PWRINF: QRYINF=FSLOWPC;

4. Range and unit
- 200 ~ 55, in the unit of 0.25 dB
0
6. Setting Tradeoff
This parameter controls the maximum transmission power of forward channel, and prevents
single TCH from seizing too many forward powers because of power control.
If the value of this parameter is too great, the voice quality is still OK, but the forward capacity is
reduced in bad radio environments.
If the value of this parameter is too small, the voice quality is reduced sharply, and even the calls
may be dropped, but the forward capacity is relatively large in bad radio environments.
7. Remarks
The operating range of this parameter should not beyond (PICH gain - 6dB) ~ PICH gain.
3.1.2 FWDMINCHGAIN (Minimum Transmit Power Offset of Forward

Channel)
1. Description
It indicates the offset of the minimum transmission power of forward channel relative to pilot
channel gain, Minimum Transmit Power of Forward Channel = Pilot Channel Gain + Minimum
Transmit Power Offset of Forward Channel.

2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD FSLOWPC

4. Range and Units
-200 ~ 55, in the unit of 0.25 dB
-36
If the value of this parameter is too great, the voice quality is improved slightly but the forward
capacity is reduced in good radio environments.
If the value of this parameter is reduced, the voice quality changes slightly, but the forward
capacity is improved in good radio environments. The power however can increase quickly when
the radio environments are bad.

7. Remarks
None
3.1.3 FWDINITCHGAIN (Forward Channel Initial Transmit Power)
1. Description
It indicates the initial transmit power of forward channel in the measurement report power
control.
During the capacity test, the forward initial transmit power can be small to ensure the capacity.
For example, if the capacity is tested in good radio environments, the value of this parameter can
be reduced sharply to -68 (the PICH gain is -28), but the calls can be connected.
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD FSLOWPC

4. Range and Units
-200 ~ 55, in the unit of 0.25 dB
0
The initial Tx. power must be smaller than the maximum Tx power to ensure the voice quality of
calls at early stage.
If the forward radio environments are good and FER is relatively low, the forward power can be
reduced sharply.
Figure 3-1 Power adjustment
7. Remarks
None.
3.1.4 THRSPWRDWN (Power Decrease Step)
1. Description
It specifies power down step of each slow power control when the HTMeasureRpt timer expires.
The smaller the step, the less the probability of call drop caused by power decrease is.
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD FSLOWPC

4. Range and Units
0 - 255, in the unit of 0.25 dB
2, that is, 0.5 dB
If the value of this parameter is too great, the calls may be dropped because the power decreases
sharply.
If the value of this parameter is too small, the power changes slightly and the calls may not be
dropped easily, but the powers may be wasted.

7. Remarks
None
3.1.5 PWRRPTTHRS (Power Control Reporting Threshold)
1. Description
The MS reports the power measurement report message (PMRM) when the number of received
bad frames reaches the value of this parameter.

2. Type
Um interface parameter, sent in the SPM, used by the MS.
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD FSLOWPC

4. Range and Units
0 - 31, in the unit of frame
2 (It is recommended that PWRRPTTHRS should not be modified).
If the value of this parameter is too great, the radio fading cannot be reflected quickly to cause the
power control delay in the mode of value measurement report power control. If the value of this
parameter is too small, the measurement report is reported frequently and the too much signaling
affects the voice quality.
If the period is 1, the MS reports a PMRM when receiving a bad frame. If the target FER is 1%, it
is normal if one bad frame of 100 frames is received. If the value of this parameter is 1, mistaking
bad frames as the need for power up cannot help reach the better power control performance.
7. Remarks
None
3.1.6 PWRRTPFRMNUM (Power Control Reporting Frame Count)
1. Description
It determines the measurement report period Z. Z = 5 * 2PWRRPTFRMNUM / 2 frames. In the period
measurement report power control, a PMRM is reported within Z frames.

In the value measurement power control, the bad frames measured once within Z frames. If the
total number of bad frames within the Z frames does not meet the value of PWRRPTTHRS, the
bad frames are measured within the next Z frames.
If the number of bad frames reaches the value of PWRRPTHRS before the period of Z frames
ends, a PMRM is reported, and a new period of Z frames starts.

2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD FSLOWPC

4. Range and Units
0 - 15, in the unit of frame
0:FRAME5,1:FRAME7,2:FRAME10,3:FRAME14,4:FRAME20,5:FRAME28,6:FRAME40,7:
FRAME56,8:FRAME80,9:FRAME113,10:FRAME160,11:FRAME226,12:FRAME320,13:FR
AME452,14:FRAME640,15:FRAME905.
9, that is, 113 frames
In the mode of value measurement report power control, this value is used as a measurement
period only. If the value is large, the measurement times can be reduced, and the total number of
frames is small because of the period separation and calculated bad frames are greater than
received bad frames.
In the period measurement report power control, this value is set according to target FER and
PWRRPTTHRS. For example, if the target FER is 1 and the value of PWRRPTTHRS is 2, the
period must be about 200 frames. According to the formula, the value of this parameter is 11
(corresponding to 226 frames). Usually, the period measurement report power control is not used.
7. Remarks
None
3.1.7 PWRRPTDELAY (Power Report Delay)
1. Description
After a PMRM is reported, the MS re-measure the number of frames within next period after
short time.
The value of this parameter determines the next period after the MS waits for how many frames.
Therefore, this parameter is set aiming to measure the number of forward frames after the forward
power control triggered by the last PMRM takes effect.

2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD FSLOWPC

4. Range and Units
0 - 31, in the unit of 4 frames
1
The greater the value of this parameter, the more the missing error frames. Therefore, the
minimum value of this parameter is 1, that is, a separation of four frames.

7. Remarks
It is not recommended to modify this parameter value
3.1.8 FWDVCFCHFER1 (Expected FER1 of F-FCH Voice Service)
1. Description
This parameter indicates the target FER of F-FCH voice services.
2. Type
It is an internal BSC algorithm parameter.
This parameter applies to ordinary users.

3. Command Name
Modify: MOD FER
Query: V3R1/V3R6 LST PWRINF:QRYINF=FER

4. Range and Units
Parameter FER Parameter FER
FER0 FER16 8.0%
FER1 FER17 8.5%
FER2 FER18 9.0%
FER3 FER19 9.5%
FER4 FER20 10.0%
FER5 FER21 11%
FER6 FER22 12%
FER7 FER23 13%
FER8 FER24 14%
FER9 FER25 15%
FER10 FER26 18%
FER11 FER27 21%
FER12 FER28 24%
FER13 FER29 27%
FER14 FER30 30%
FER15
5. Range and unit
FER2 ( 1.0% )
The high target FER saves power of forward channel units, but increases the actual FER of
physical links, which in turn decreases the link quality and voice quality. If the forward FER is
between 1% and 3%, the forward voice quality differs slightly. Therefore, in a network with high
forward load, you can set the target FER slightly higher, to reduce the forward load and increase
the forward capacity.
The low target FER decreases the actual FER of physical links and improves the voice quality.
But more forward power is consumed to ensure low FER. Therefore, in a network with light
forward load, you can decrease the target FER slightly, to improve the voice quality.
7. Remarks
None
3.1.9 REVVCFCHFER1 (Expected FER1 of R-FCH Voice Service)
1. Description
This parameter indicates the expected FER of R-FCH voice services.
2. Type
It is an internal BSC algorithm parameter

3. Command Name
Modify: MOD FER

4. Range and Units
FER0 FER16 8.0%
FER1 FER17 8.5%
FER2 FER18 9.0%
FER3 FER19 9.5%
FER4 FER20 10.0%
FER5 FER21 11%
FER6 FER22 12%
FER7 FER23 13%
FER8 FER24 14%
FER9 FER25 15%
FER10 FER26 18%
FER11 FER27 21%
FER12 FER28 24%
FER13 FER29 27%
FER14 FER30 30%
FER15
5. Range and unit
FER2 ( 1.0% )
The low reverse target FER improves reverse link quality but consumes more reverse power.
On the contrary, the high target FER reduces reverse link quality and demands on reverse power.
Generally, when the FER is between 1% to 3%, the voice quality differs slightly. To save the MS
power and increase reverse capacity, you can set this parameter to a slightly high value.
7. Remarks
None
3.1.10 REVVCTDCCHFER1 (Expected FER1 of R-DCCH Voice Service)
1. Description
This parameter refers to the expected FER of R-DCCH voice services.
2. Type

3. Command Name
Modify: MOD FER

4. Range and Units
FER0 FER16 8.0%
FER1 FER17 8.5%
FER2 FER18 9.0%
FER3 FER19 9.5%
FER4 FER20 10.0%
FER5 FER21 11%
FER6 FER22 12%
FER7 FER23 13%
FER8 FER24 14%
FER9 FER25 15%
FER10 FER26 18%
FER11 FER27 21%
FER12 FER28 24%
FER13 FER29 27%
FER14 FER30 30%
FER15
5. Range and unit
FER2 ( 1.0% )
None
7. Remarks
None
3.1.11 FWDDATFCHFER1 (Expected FER1 of F-FCH Data Service)
1. Description
This parameter indicates the target FER of F-FCH data services.
2. Type

3. Command Name
Modify: MOD FER

4. Range and Units
FER0 FER16 8.0%
FER1 FER17 8.5%
FER2 FER18 9.0%
FER3 FER19 9.5%
FER4 FER20 10.0%
FER5 FER21 11%
FER6 FER22 12%
FER7 FER23 13%
FER8 FER24 14%
FER9 FER25 15%
FER10 FER26 18%
FER11 FER27 21%
FER12 FER28 24%
FER13 FER29 27%
FER14 FER30 30%
FER15
5. Range and unit
FER2 ( 1.0% )
6.Setting Tradeoffs
The high target FER saves power of forward channel units, but lowers the transmission
capability of data services. Therefore, in a network with heavy forward load, you can slightly
increase the target FER to reduce the forward load.
The low target FER improves the transmission capability of data services, but consumes more
forward power. Therefore, in a network with light forward load, you can slightly decrease the
target FER to improve the data transmission.
7. Remarks
None
3.1.12 REVDATFCHFER1 (Expected FER1 of R-FCH Data Service)
1. Description
This parameter refers to the target FER of R-FCH data services.
2. Type

3. Command Name
Modify: MOD FER

4. Range and Units
FER0 FER16 8.0%
FER1 FER17 8.5%
FER2 FER18 9.0%
FER3 FER19 9.5%
FER4 FER20 10.0%
FER5 FER21 11%
FER6 FER22 12%
FER7 FER23 13%
FER8 FER24 14%
FER9 FER25 15%
FER10 FER26 18%
FER11 FER27 21%
FER12 FER28 24%
FER13 FER29 27%
FER14 FER30 30%
FER15
5. Range and unit
FER2 ( 1.0% )
The high FER saves reverse power, but lowers the transmission capability of data services.
Therefore, in a network with heavy forward load, you can slightly increase the target FER to
reduce the forward load.
The reverse link quality and reverse power consumption increases when the FER decreases.
You can adjust the reverse target FER based on the actual situation. Generally, the FER is
controlled within 3%.
7. Remarks
None
8. Configuration Examples
It is recommended that the parameters above use default value, except the switch should be
configured according to network application scene.

Example 1
/*Not limit the BTS code channel transmit power*
MOD FSLOWPC: CN = 903, SCTID = 0, FWDMAXCHGAIN = 0, FWDMINCHGAIN = - 255;
The command above could be modified for different versions, it is only for reference.
3.2 Forward EIB Power Control Parameters
3.2.1 FWDCHMAXGAIN (F-TCH Maximum Transmit Power Offset)
1. Description
It indicates the offset of the maximum transmission power of forward channel relative to pilot
channel gain, F-TCH Maximum Transmit Power = Pilot Channel Gain + F-TCH Maximum
Transmit Power Offset. Adjusting this parameter helps balance the capacity and quality, so this
parameter is determined as required.

2. Type
It is an internal BSC algorithm parameter, used by the power control module of FMR.
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD FEIBPC
Query: LST RRMINF: RRMINF= FEIBPC;

4. Range and Units
-200 ~ 55, in the unit of 0.25 dB
0
This parameter controls the maximum transmission power of forward channel and prevents
single TCH from seizing too many forward powers because of power control.
If the value of this parameter is too great, the voice quality is still OK, but the forward capacity is
reduced in bad radio environments.
If the value of this parameter is too small, the voice quality is reduced sharply, and even the calls
are dropped, but the forward capacity is relatively large in bad radio environments.
7. Remarks
None
3.2.2 FWDCHMINGAIN (F-TCH Minimum Transmit Power Offset)
1. Description
It indicates the offset of the minimum transmission power of forward channel relative to pilot
channel gain, F-TCH Minimum Transmit Power = Pilot Channel Gain + F-TCH Minimum
Transmit Power Offset.

2. Type
It is an internal BSC algorithm parameter, used by the power control module of FMR.
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD FEIBPC
Query: LST RRMINF: RRMINF= FEIBPC;
4. Range and Units

-200 ~ 55, in the unit of 0.25 dB
-72
If the value of this parameter is too great, the voice quality is improved slightly, but the forward
capacity is reduced in good radio environments. If the value of this parameter is reduced, the
voice quality changes slightly, but the forward capacity is improved in good radio environments.
The power however can increase quickly when radio environments are bad.
7. Remarks
None
3.2.3 Configuration Examples

Example 1
MOD FEIBPC: CN=903, SCTID=0, FWDCHMAXGAIN=0, FWDCHMINGAIN=-255;
3.3 Forward Fast Power Control Parameters
3.3.1 FPWRSTEP (Forward Power Control Step)
1. Description
It indicates the value of power-up and power-down when one power control bit is received.
2. Type
It is an A3 interface and Abis interface parameter, used by the BTS.
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD FFASTPC: FPWRSTEP=2;
Query: V3R1/V3R6 - LST PWRINF: QRYINF= FFASTPC;
4. Range and Units

2, that is, 0.5 dB
If the value of this parameter is too great, the forward transmit power is wasted. If the value of this
parameter is too small, the power changes slowly and the fading cannot be compensated quickly.
7. Remarks
The operating range of this parameter should not beyond 1~2.
3.3.2 IS95SCHGAIN1 (IS95 Forward Power Control Subchannel Gain 1)
1. Description
It indicates power control gain 1 of forward power control subchannel relative to F-TCH for the
single branch, as for the IS95 MSs.
The forward power control subchannel is composed of partial power control bits from F-FCH or
F-DCCH, and is part of F-TCH.
In the case of single branch, they require the same powers. In the soft handoff state, service
frames are the maximum multipath energy ratio combination for the MS, but the power control
subchannel gain must be demodulated separately on respective branch. When a branch indicates
power down, the MS decreases the power. When all the branches indicate power up, the MS
increase the power. At that time, the power of power control subchannel must be higher than
transmission power of TCH.

2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD FFASTPC: IS95SCHGAIN1=0;
4. Range and Units

0, that is, 0 dB
If there are no soft handoff branches, the forward power control subchannel is consistent with
F-TCH.
7. Remarks
For two softer handoff branches, the power control bits are also the maximum multipath energy
ratio combination. The power control bits are processed like TCH, that is, the energies of two
branches are added, because the power control bits from the same BTS are consistent.
The soft handoff and softer handoff are identified through the field PWR_COMB_IND in the
enhanced handoff direction message (EHDM). This field identifies whether the power control bit
of soft handoff branch is the same as that of the previous branch in the EHDM. If does, this
branch and the previous branch are from the same BTS, and they perform a softer handoff, and
the value of this field is set to 1. If no, this branch and the previous branch are from different
BTSs, and they perform a soft handoff, so the value of this field is set to 0.
For the two soft handoff branches, the power control bits are combined in the mode of "OR", that
is, when the power control bits of two branches require MS power Up, the MS increases the
power. If the power control bits of one branch require MS power down, the MS decreases the
power.
1. Description
It indicates power control subchannel gain 2 for two branches as for IS95 MSs, and the
relationship between the transmit power of forward power control subchannel and that of TCH.
For details, see IS95SCHGAIN1.

2. Type
It is an A3 interface and Abis interface parameter, used by the BTS
3. Command Name
4. Range and Units

0 - 127, in the case of 0.25 dB
12, that is, 3 dB
None
7. Remarks
None
1. Description
It indicates power control subchannel gain 3 for three or more branches as for IS95 MSs and the
For details, see IS95SCHGAIN1.

2. Type
3. Command Name
4. Range and Units

0 - 127, in the case of 0.25 dB
19, that is, 4.75 dB
None
7. Remarks
None
1. Description
It indicates the power control subchannel gain 1 for single branch as for IS2000 MSs. For details,
see IS95SCHGAIN1.
In addition, the value of IS95SCHGAIN1 is less than that of IS2000SCHGAIN1, because the
forward TCH power of IS2000 is smaller than that of IS95, so the subchannel gain of IS2000
must be larger to ensure correct reverse power control bits.

2. Type
It is an A3 interface and Abis interface parameter, used by the BTS and also an Um interface
parameter (sent in the ECAM) used by the MS.

3. Command Name
Modify: MOD FFASTPC: IS2KSCHGAIN1=12;
4. Range and Units
12, that is, 3 dB
None
7. Remarks
None
1. Description
It indicates the power control subchannel gain 2 for two branches as for IS2000 MSs, and the
For details, see IS95CSHGAIN1.

2. Type
It is an A3 interface and Abis interface parameter used by the BTS and also an Um interface

3. Command Name

4. Range and Units
24, that is, 6 dB
None
7. Remarks
None
1. Description
It indicates the power control subchannel gain 3 for three or more branches as for IS2000 MSs,
and the relationship between transmit power of forward power control subchannel and that of
TCH. For details, see IS95SCHGAIN1.

2. Type
It is an A3 interface and Abis interface parameter used by the BTS and also an Um interface

3. Command Name
4. Range and Units
None
7. Remarks
None
3.3.8 VINITFCH (Voice Service FCH Initial Eb/Nt Value)
1. Description
It indicates the F-FCH initial Eb/Nt set values of the FCH forward outer loop power control. The
principle of forward outer loop power control is similar to that of reverse outer loop power control.
For details, see VFCHREVINIT (Voice Service Reverse Initial Set Value for FCH).
For voice service and data service, this parameter is set separately.
2. Type
It is an Um interface parameter (sent in the ECAM) used by the MS.
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD FFASTPC: VINITFCH=40;
4. Range and Units

40, that is, 5 dB
None
7. Remarks
None
3.3.9 VMAXFCH (Voice Service FCH Max. Eb/Nt Value)
1. Description
It indicates the permitted maximum Eb/Nt values of the FCH forward outer loop power control.
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD FFASTPC: , VMAXFCH=80;

4. Range and Units
80, that is, 10 dB
In the earlier R002B03D006, the value is set to 114.

If the value of this parameter is too great, the communication quality can be ensured in bad radio
environments, but the power control overshoot is too great and the forward capacity is affected.
If the value of the parameter is too small, the voice quality is affected dramatically in bad radio
environments and even the calls may be dropped.

7. Remarks
The operating range of this parameter should not beyond 48~80.
3.3.10 VMINFCH (Voice Service FCH Min. Eb/Nt Value)
1. Description
It indicates the permitted minimum Eb/Nt set values of the FCH forward outer loop power control.
For details, see VMAXFCH (Voice Service FCH Max. Eb/Nt Value).
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD FFASTPC: VMINFCH=16;
4. Range and Units

16, that is, 2 dB
If the value of this parameter is large, the voice quality cannot be improved largely even in good
radio environments, but the capacity is affected.

7. Remarks
None
3.3.11 VFCHINITGAINFIX (Voice Service Forward FCH Initial Power

Correction Value)
1. Description
It indicates the correction values of initial Tx power calculated for forward FCH. For voice
service and data service, this parameter is set separately.
According to radio environment fields in the origination messages, the system selects the pilot
with the strongest strength as a reference. According to the following numerals, for the pilots with
the strongest strength, the pilot strength is mapped to transmit power. Adding the mapping power
to the value of this parameter is the forward initial Tx power of the call.
For the soft handoff macro diversity, each soft handoff branch uses the same initial power. The
system maps automatically the value ranging from -32 to 0 to the following numerals, with a step
of 0.5 dB.
{206, 206, 206, 206, 205,205, 205, 205, 204, 204,
204, 204, 203, 203, 203,203, 202, 202, 202, 202,
201, 201, 201, 201, 200,200, 200, 200, 199, 199,
199, 199, 198, 198, 198,198, 197, 197, 197, 197,
196, 196, 196, 196, 195,195, 195, 195, 194, 194,
194, 194, 193, 193, 193,193, 192, 192, 192, 192,
191, 191, 191, 191}
that is, the value of N2 x (Ec/Io + 32) is the initial power of Ec/Io.
For example, when Ec/Io is -6, the initial power is the value of N52, 194.
The better the pilot strength, the better the radio environments are. Less initial powers are
required.
2. Type
It is an internal algorithm parameter.
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD FFASTPC: VFCHINITGAINFIX=46;
4. Range and Units

46
If the value of this parameter is too great, the call quality at the early state can be ensured, but the
initial power must be less than the maximum power. When the pilot ratio is high, such as over
20%, the value of this parameter must increase to ensure that the MSs at different places can
access successfully the network and the value matches with the pilot power. After the reverse
channel is captured, the forward power control takes effect. At that time, even the forward powers
(basically the same as pilot powers) used for sending full-rate frames are reduced to a normal
value within several frames (that is, several 20ms) because of the fast power control at a sped of
800 times/s.
Therefore, when the preamble and full-rate frames are sent, even though the Tx powers are
basically the same as the pilot powers, the forward capacity is affected slightly.
If the value of this parameter is too small, the Tx powers calculated are not largely less than the
pilot powers when the worst Ec/Io is present. Consequently, the MSs are difficult to access the
network.
7. Remarks
None
3.3.12 VFCHMAXGAINR1 (Voice Service FCH Max. Gain 1 Offset)/

DFCHMAXGAINR1 (Data Service FCH Max. Gain 1 Offset)
1. Description
It indicates the offset of voice/data service FCH maximum gain 1 relative to pilot channel gain,
They specify the maximum gain 1 of the forward FCH with two branches when the call is not in
the soft handoff state. For voice service and data service, this parameter is set separately.
Voice/Data Service FCH Maximum Gain 1 = Pilot Channel Gain + Voice/Data Service FCH
Maximum Gain 1 Offset.
In the BTS R001, for the IS2000 TCHs of RC3 demodulated by the QPSK, the output power is 3
dB higher than the set value.
In the BTS3612 of the R002B02D001 and later and BTS3601C of R001B03D002 and later, the
gain of 3 dB is deducted automatically.

2. Type
It is an A3 interface and Abis interface parameter used by the BTS.
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD FFASTPC: VFCHMAXGAINR1=-28;
4. Range and Units

-200 ~ 55, in the unit of 0.25dB
0
If the value of this parameter is too great, the voice quality can be ensured in bad radio
environments, but the forward capacity is affected.
If the value of this parameter is too small, the voice quality is affected largely and even the calls
are dropped in bad radio environment.

7. Remarks
None
3.3.13 VFCHMINGAINR1 (Voice Service FCH Min. Gain 1 Offset)/

DFCHMINGAINR1 (Data Service FCH Min. Gain 1 Offset)
1. Description
It indicates the offset of voice/data service FCH minimum gain 1 relative to pilot channel gain,It
specifies the minimum gain 1 of the forward FCH with two branches when the call is not in the
soft handoff state. For voice service and data service, this parameter is set separately. Voice/Data
Service FCH Minimum Gain 1 = Pilot Channel Gain + Voice/Data Service FCH Minximum Gain
1 Offset.
In the BTS R001, for the IS2000 TCHs of RC3 demodulated by the QPSK, the output power is 3
dB higher than the set value.
In the BTS3612 of the R002B02D001 and later and BTS3601C of R001B03D002 and later, the
gain of 3 dB is deducted automatically.

2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD FFASTPC: VFCHMINGAINR1=-124;
V3R1/V3R6 - LST PWRINF: QRYINF= FFASTPC;
4. Range and Units
-96
If the value of this parameter is too small, the system capacity can be improved largely when the
radio environments are good and the voice quality is not reduced largely.
If the value of this parameter is too great, the voice quality is not affected largely but the system
capacity is reduced sharply.

7. Remarks
None
3.3.14 VFCHMAXGAINR2(Voice Service FCH Max. Gain 2 Offset)/

1. Description
It indicates the offset of voice/data service FCH maximum gain 2 relative to pilot channel gain,
It specifies the maximum gain 2 of the forward FCH with two branches. For voice service and
data service, this parameter is set separately. Voice/Data Service FCH Maximum Gain 2 = Pilot
Channel Gain + Voice/Data Service FCH Maximum Gain 2 Offset.
See VFCHMAXGAINR1 (Voice Service FCH Max. Gain 1 Offset) for reference.
2. Type
3. Command Name
4. Range and Units

-200 ~ 55, in the unit of 0.25 dB
0
See VFCHMAXGAINR1 (Voice Service FCH Max. Gain 1 Offset)
7. Remarks
None

1. Description
It indicates the offset of voice/data service FCH minimum gain 2 relative to pilot channel gain, It
specifies the minimum gain 2 of the forward FCH with two branches. For voice service and data
service, this parameter is set separately. Voice/Data Service FCH Minimum Gain 2 = Pilot
Channel Gain + Voice/Data Service FCH Minximum Gain 2 Offset.
See VFCHMINGAINR1 (Voice Service FCH Min. Gain 1 Offset) for reference.
2. Type
3. Command Name

4. Range and Units
-200 ~ 55, in the unit of 0.25 dB
-84
See VFCHMINGAINR1 (Voice Service FCH Min. Gain 1 Offset).
7. Remarks
None
3.3.16 VFCHMAXGAINR3 (Voice Service FCH Max. Gain 3 Offset)/

1. Description
It indicates the offset of voice/data service FCH maximum gain 3 relative to pilot channel gain, It
specifies the maximum gain 3 of the forward FCH with three or more branches. For voice service
and data service, this parameter is set separately. Voice/Data Service FCH Maximum Gain 3 =
Pilot Channel Gain + Voice/Data Service FCH Maximum Gain 3 Offset.
See VFCHMAXGAINR1 (Voice Service FCH Max. Gain 1 Offset) for reference.
2. Type
3. Command Name
4. Range and Units

0
See VFCHMAXGAINR1 (Voice Service FCH Max. Gain 1 Offset)
7. Remarks
None

1. Description
It indicates the offset of voice/data service FCH minimum gain 3 relative to pilot channel gain, It
specifies the minimum gain 3 of the forward FCH with three or more branches. For voice service
and data service, this parameter is set separately. Voice/Data Service FCH Minimum Gain 3 =
Pilot Channel Gain + Voice/Data Service FCH Minximum Gain 3 Offset.
See VFCHMINXGAINR1 (Voice Service FCH Min. Gain 1 Offset) for reference.
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD FFASTPC: VFCHMINGAINR3=-100;
4. Range and Units

-200~ 55, in the unit of 0.25 dB
[Operating Range]
(PICH gain- 24 dB) - (PICH gain-10 dB)

-72
See VFCHMINGAINR1 (Voice Service FCH Min. Gain 1 Offset).
7. Remarks
None

Example 1
MOD FFASTPC: CN=903, SCTID=0, VMAXFCH=253, VMINFCH=0;
Here VMAXFCH is set to 253, not 255. It is because RC4 has an offset of 2 to RC3.
3.4 Forward Power Synchronization Parameters
3.4.1 FWDPWRSYNSWT (Forward Power Synchronization Switch)
1. Description
This parameter specifies the forward power synchronization switch for BTS.
2. Type
It is an internal BTS parameter.
3. Command Name
Modify: SET (C)BTSSIGSOFTPARA
Query: Execute the command DSP (C)BTSBRDSPECSTAT on TELNET, to query the
BCKMSIG special status

4. Range and Units
ON (ON)
OFF (OFF)
OFF
If the TCH power synchronization function is switched on, the forward load can be decreased on
the scene of asynchronous forward power, but the CPU ratio of Channel Processing board is
increased.
7. Remarks
As long as the BSC set PWRSYNSW to ON, the TCH power synchronization function is
switched on
3.4.2 SCHPWRSYNSW (SCH Power Synchronization Switch)
1. Description
It controls whether to perform SCH power synchronization.
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD BSCPWR
Query: LST BSCPWR

4. Range and Units
ON (ON)
OFF (OFF)
OFF (OFF)
If the TCH power synchronization function is switched on, the forward load can be decreased on
the scene of asynchronous forward power, but the CPU ratio of Channel Processing board is
increased.
7. Remarks
None
3.5 Reverse Power Control Parameters
3.5.1 NOMPWR (Nominal Transmit Power Offset)
1. Description
It is an open loop power control parameter and indicates nominal transmit power offset. It is used
by the MS to estimate initial power of access channel in the case of open loop power control
correction. The range of (NOM_PWR - 16 * NOM_PWR_EXT) is from -24 to +7dB. When the
MS is operating in BandClass 0, NOM_PWR_EXT is set to 0, so the range is from -8 to 7.
For NOMPWREXT (Tx Power Extension Indication), see the description of this parameter in the
APM.
2. Type
It is an Um interface parameter, sent in the (APM/UHDM/GHDM.
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD APM

4. Range and Units
-8 ~ 7, in the unit of dB
4
If the value of this parameter is too great, the reverse initial Tx power may increase, and extra
interference for the reverse link exists.
If the value of this parameter is too small, the initial access probe energy is too slow and cannot be
received correctly by the BTS, and the access speed and success rate are affected.
7. Remarks
None
3.5.2 INITPWR (Access Initial Power Offset)
1. Description
It is an open loop power control parameter and determines initial transmission power offset of
power probe frame. The physical meaning is to adjust the first access probe frame and enable the
transmission power to be less than required power. In addition, the value of this parameter can
partially compensate path loss difference caused by incomplete relevance between CDMA
forward channel and reverse channel.
In actual networks, if there are too many access attempts, the access may fail or the MS accesses
the network once, the parameters, such as NOMPWR, PWRSTEP, and STEPNUM are adjusted
orderly. If the parameters are appropriate, INITPWR is adjusted.

2. Type
It is an Um interface parameter, sent in the APM.
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD APM

4. Range and Units
16,that is 0
The value of this parameter varies with actual load.
If the value of this parameter is too great, the reverse capacity is affected and there are many
redundant powers.
If the value of this parameter is too small, the MS can access the network after several attempts,
the MS access takes a longer time and even the access may fail.
7. Remarks
None
3.5.3 PWRSTEP (Access Power Increment)
1. Description
It indicates power increase step.
When an MS is probing for access, the power for next probe must increase if the previous one
fails, that is, the power between two neighbor access probes must increase.
Tx power used for MS access = access attempts * power up step.
The value varies with radio environments. If the radio environments are good, such as open lands,
the step can be small. The MS access power is stable.
After INITPWR and NOMPWR are set, the power for the first probe is less than access power
required. The MS can access the system after 2~3 access probes through several small power
up-steps. The reverse transmission power is minimized and the interference on the system is also
the smallest. Otherwise, the power Up step must be greater.

2. Type
It is an Um interface parameter, sent in the APM.
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD APM

4. Range and Units
0 - 7 (dB)
4
If the value of this parameter is too great, reverse Tx power may be too large and the reverse link
interference increases.
If the value of this parameter is too small, the MS accesses the system after multiple access probes.
2-3 access probes are the best.
During the actual application, a test is conducted under the BTS to judge whether open loop
power control parameters are set properly. If the MS accesses the system after multiple access
probes, the parameters may be set improperly, so the parameters must be modified.
7. Remarks
None
3.5.4 NUMSTEP (Number of Access Probes)
1. Description
It specifies access probes allowed for each access probe sequence.
2. Type
It is an Um interface parameter (APM).
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD APM

4. Range and Units
0 - 15
5
The greater the value of this parameter, the easier an access probe sequence is accessed. The
reverse link interference may increase, because access failure also may be caused by the collision.
If the access fails, the call attempt interval is longer. NUMSTEP, PWRSTEP, and INITPWR
determine the access performance.

7. Remarks
PWRSTEP and NUMSTEP must be balanced.
If the value of PWRSTEP is small, the value of NUMSTEP is great.
If the value of PWRSTEP is great, the value of NUMSTEP is small.
3.5.5 REVPWRSTEP (Reverse Power Control Step)
1. Description
It indicates reverse closed loop power control step.
If an MS receives an UP power control bit on forward power control subchannel, the transmit
power of MS increases by one step on the basis of open loop estimated value and closed loop
adjustment value.
If MS does not support the operations on reverse supplemental channel or RSCCH, the MS must
support1 dB step of power control. Otherwise, the MS must support 0.5 dB and 1 dB step of
power control. If the MS supports 0.25 dB step of power control, the MS also must support 0.5 dB
and 1 dB step of power control.

2. Type
It is an Um interface parameter (PCNM, UHDM, and GHDM), used by the MS.
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD RCLPC: REVPWRCSTEP=STEP0.5;
Query: V3R1/V3R6 - LST PWRINF: QRYINF=RCLPC;

4. Range and Units
0-2
0 indicates 1 dB step, 1 indicates 0.5 dB step, 2 indicates 0.25 dB step.

1
If the step is small, the power changes slightly. If the step is large, the power changes
dramatically.
The reverse power control reaches 800 times per second, so the power control speed can reach the
requirement. The smaller the power control step, the more accurate the power control, and the
less power is wasted. 0.25 dB step is the most effective on saving system power.
When an MS does not support the power control of a step, and the step of this parameter is small,
the MS selects an MS-supported step. For example, if the minimum power control step of MS is
0.5 dB, but the reverse power control step of system is 0.25 dB, the MS automatically sets the
power control step to 0.5 dB.

7. Remarks
In the RC1 and RC2, if MS cannot transmit at required output power level on the reverse traffic
channel, MS must stop sending at least one activation RSCCH. Consequently, MS can transmit at
required output power on the reverse fundamental channel within the next 20 ms frame.
In the RC3 to RC6, if MS cannot transmit at required output power level on the reverse traffic
channel, the MS decreases data rate of reverse fundamental channel or reduce transmit power, or
stops sending at least one activation code channel, such as reverse fundamental channel, RSCH,
or reverse dedicated control channel.
The operation is performed within 40 ms after MS cannot transmit at required output power level
on the reverse traffic channel but before next 20 ms frame starts. If the forward output power must
change, RF gain is adjusted first.
3.5.6 VFCHRLGAINADJ (Voice Service R-FCH Power Adjust Gain Relative

to ACH)
1. Description
It indicates R-TCH power adjust gains relative to ACH, enhanced ACH, and reverse universal
control channel.
As shown in the following formula, after the MS accesses a system over the ACH, initial power
of traffic channel = current ACH power + the parameter.
Mean output power (dBm) =
- mean input power (dBm)
+ offset power (from Table 2.1.2.3.1-1)
+ interference correction
+ ACC_CORRECTIONS
+ RLGAIN_ADJs
2. Type
It is an Um interface parameter (sent in the ECAM), used by MS.
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD RCLPC: VFCHRLGAINADJ=3;

4. Range and Units
3
A high value of this parameter helps improve transmission quality at the early stage of a call, as
well as call setup success rate, but the system capacity is affected and the MS consumes more
powers.
7. Remarks
None
3.5.7 VFCHREVINIT (Voice Service Reverse Initial Set Value for FCH)
1. Description
In different RCs, the different initial Eb/Nt corresponds to different Ec/Io. After setting the Eb/Nt,
the system automatically converts the Eb/Nt into Ec/Io, and the values are set in the BTS.
The value of this parameter is appropriate if it does not cause an excessive overshoot.
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD RCLPC: VFCHREVINIT=48;

4. Range and Units
If the recommended value is 48, whatever RCs, initial Eb/Nt =6dB.
If the value of this parameter is too great, the revere outer loop power control starts at a high
power level.
If the value of this parameter is too small, the Eb/Nt increases through reverse outer loop power
control. In this case, the received FER cannot reach the target FER.
The value affects the time when Eb/Nt is adjusted to a proper value. If the value of this parameter
is set to a proper value, Eb/Nt can be adjusted to the required value quickly. The network
performance meets the need of specified FER, without power waste.
If the value of this parameter is too small, the FER of the network cannot reach specified FER
(such as 1%) at the beginning.

If the value of this parameter is too great, the power wastes at the beginning.
7. Remarks
For voice service and data service, this parameter is set separately in the R03 and later version.
The operating range of this parameter is (REV_MIN_FCH_SET_PT + 3dB) ~
REV_MAX_FCH_SET_PT - 1 dB).
3.5.8 VMAXFCH (Voice Service Max. Value of FCH Outer Loop)
1. Description
They indicate the maximum set values of R-FCH Eb/Nt.
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD RCLPC:VMAXFCH=96;

4. Range and Units
If the recommended value is 96, whatever the RCs, maximum set value of outer loop R-FCH
Eb/Nt =12 dB.

If the value of this parameter is too great, the conversation quality can be secured even when the
radio environments are bad, but the reverse capacity is reduced.
If the value of this parameter is too small, the calls may be dropped in the case of fading, such as
a corner.
In the case of large interference, the value of this parameter increases to secure the conversation
quality and decrease the call drops.
The maximum transmit power of MS is limited, so the function is limited.

7. Remarks
For voice service and data service, this parameter is set separately in the R03 and later. The
operating range of this parameter is 48~96.

3.5.9 VMINFCH (Voice Service Min. Value of FCH Outer Loop)
1. Description
They are reverse closed loop power control parameters and indicate the minimum set values of
the R-FCH Eb/Nt.
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD RCLPC: VMINFCH=16;

4. Range and Units
If the recommended value of VMINFCH is 16, the minimum set value Eb/Nt of outer loop is 2
dB.
If the value of this parameter is too great and reverse SNR Eb/Nt is higher than actual value,
reverse power wastes and reverse capacity is affected largely. If the value of this parameter is too
small, reverse outer loop algorithm can be adjusted largely.
If the power control performance is better, the voice quality can be secured and reverse capacity
improves. If the value of this parameter is too small, the set value may drop largely, and the
fading cannot be compensated in time to affect the voice quality.

7. Remarks
None
3.5.10 FCHENDWNSTEP (Eb/Nt Down Step for FCH)
1. Description
It indicates the down step for the R-FCH outer loop power control after FCHPWRCFRQ (reverse
outer loop control power for FCH) good frames are received.
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD RCLPC: FCHENDWNSTEP=1;

4. Range and Units
If the value of this parameter is small, the power changes slightly and the overshoot is small. If the
value of this parameter is large, the power changes largely, and the overshoot is large.
The value of this parameter is 1 to ensure a high accuracy of power control accuracy.
7. Remarks
None
3.5.11 FCH ENMAXSTEP (Eb/Nt Max. Adjustment Step for FCH)
1. Description
It indicates the maximum adjustment step for the R-FCH outer loop power control, and means the
maximum limitation amplitude of calculated value after UP step of set value based on reverse
outer loop algorithm.
For details, see FCHPWRCFRQ (Reverse Outer Loop Power Control Period for FCH).
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD RCLPC: FCHENMAXSTEP=20;

4. Range and Units
This parameter aims to restrict adjustment step for outer loop power control.
If the value of this parameter is too small, the expected adjustment is restricted and the normal
power control performance is unavailable.

7. Remarks
None
Example 1
MOD RCLPC: CN=903, SCTID=0, VMAXFCH=211, VMINFCH=0;
Here VMAXFCH is set to 211, not 255. It is because RC2 has an offset of 44 to RC3.
3.6 Forward SCH Initial Power Estimate
3.6.1 FWDSCHPWRESTSW (Forward SCH Power Estimate Switch)
1. Description
It indicates whether to allow the forward SCH power estimation switch.
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: V2R2/V2R3/V3R1 - MOD BSCRSM

V3R6C02 - MOD FLDCTRL
Query: V2R2/V2R3/V3R1 - LST BSCRSM
V3R6 C02 - LST RSMINF;

4. Range and Units
ON (ON)
OFF (OFF)
OFF
Set the parameter to ON will enable forward SCH power estimation function. Otherwise use the
default value.
7. Remarks
None
3.6.2 SCHINITGAIN 1X (1X F-SCH Initial Tx Gain) / SCHINITGAIN 2X (2X

F-SCH Initial Tx Gain) / SCHINITGAIN 4X (4X F-SCH Initial Tx Gain) /
SCHINITGAIN 8X (8X F-SCH Initial Tx Gain) / SCHINITGAIN 16X (16X
F-SCH Initial Tx Gain) / SCHINITGAIN32X (32X F-SCH Initial Tx Gain)
1. Description
When the forward SCH power estimate function is switched off, use these parameters for initial
Tx power gains of forward SCH.

2. Type
It is an Abis interface parameter used by the BTS.
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD FFASTPC
Query: LST RRMINF: RRMINF= FFASTPC;

4. Range and Units
-200 ~ 55, in the unit of 0.25 dB
When the PICH gain is -28, the recommended values are shown in the following table:
Rate Recommended value
1x -44
2x -44
4x -44
8x -32
16x -32
32x -28
None
7. Remarks
None
3.7 Forward SCH Power Control Parameters
3.7.1 FWDSCHMAX1X (Forward 1XSCH Maximum Tx Power Offset) /

FWDSCHMAX2X (Forward 2XSCH Maximum Tx Power Offset) /
FWDSCHMAX 4X (Forward 4XSCH Maximum Tx Power Offset) /
FWDSCHMAX 32X (Forward 32XSCH Maximum Tx Power Offset)
1. Description
It indicates the offset of the maximum transition power of forward 1/2/4/8/16/32x supplement
channel relative to pilot channel gain, Maximum Transition Power of Forward
1/2/4/8/16/32XSupplement Channel = Pilot Channel Gain + Forward 1/2/4/8/16/32X SCH
Maximum Tx Gain Offset.These parameters specify 1X ~32X F-SCH maximum Tx power.

2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD FFASTPC

4. Range and Units
-255 ~ 0, in the unit of 0.25 dB
The recommended values are shown in the following table.
Rate Default Value
1X -16
2X -16
4X -8
8X -4
16X 4
32X 8
If the value of this parameter is large, in the bad coverage area, it could use more SCH power to
ensure the link quality and achieve the target F-SCH FER, but the sector power will be increased
also, thus make the transmission power fluctuate more. So if the sector forward load is not high,
increasing this parameter can make the F-SCH link quality more reliably. The larger the value of
this parameter, the less subscribers the system can support. The setting of this parameter must
consider the subscribers supported and the rate assignment threshold.
If the value of this parameter is small, in the bad coverage area, it could not use more F-SCH
power to ensure the link quality, but the sector power consumption will be decreased also, thus
make the transmission power fluctuate less. So if the sector forward load is high, decreasing this
parameter can make the forward load decreased.

7. Remarks
None
3.7.2 FWDSCHMIN1X (Forward 1XSCH Minimum Tx Power Offset) /

FWDSCHMIN2X (Forward 2XSCH Minimum Tx Power Offset) /
FWDSCHMIN 4X (Forward 4XSCH Minimum Tx Power Offset) /
FWDSCHMIN 32X (Forward 32XSCH Minimum Tx Power Offset)
1. Description
It indicates the offset of the minmum transition power of forward 1/2/4/8/16/32x supplement
channel relative to pilot channel gain, Minimum Transition Power of Forward
1/2/4/8/16/32XSupplement Channel = Pilot Channel Gain + Forward 1/2/4/8/16/32X SCH
Minimum Tx Gain Offset.These parameters specify 1X ~32X F-SCH minimum Tx power.

2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD FFASTPC

4. Range and Units
-200 ~ 55, in the unit of 0.25 dB
Rate Default Value
1X -52
Rate Default Value
2X -48
4X -44
8X -36
16X -24
32X -24
If the value of this parameter is large, the floor limit of F-SCH code channel power is relatively
high, lower F-SCH FER can be achieved, but the sector power will be increased, thus the sector
capacity will be decreased.
If the value of this parameter is small, the power can be adjusted with freedom. The F-SCH FER
can be achieved, the sector power can be saved too. But when the value of this parameter is too
low, in the scene of sudden fade, if the fast power control cannot increase the code channel power
to an appropriate value, the SCH link quality will be deteriorated suddenly and the transmission
will be aborted. Especially in the severe fluctuating radio environment, the F-SCH link quality
will fluctuate severely.

7. Remarks
None
3.7.3 FWDDATSCHFER1X (Forward 1X SCH Target FER) /

FWDDATSCHFER2X (Forward 2X SCH Target FER) /
FWDDATSCHFER32X (Forward 32X SCH Target FER)
1. Description
They indicate target FERs of F-SCHS at different rates.
2. Type
It is an Um interface parameter used by the MS.
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD FER
Query: V3R1/V3R6 - LST PWRINF: QRYINF=FER;

4. Range and Units
Value FER Value FER
FER0 0.2% FER16 8.0%
FER1 0.5% FER17 8.5%
FER2 1.0% FER18 9.0%
FER3 1.5% FER19 9.5%
FER4 2.0% FER20 10.0%
FER5 2.5% FER21 11%
FER6 3.0% FER22 12%
FER7 3.5% FER23 13%
FER8 4.0% FER24 14%
FER9 4.5% FER25 15%
FER10 5.0% FER26 18%
FER11 5.5% FER27 21%
FER12 6.0% FER28 24%
FER13 6.5% FER29 27%
FER14 7.0% FER30 30%
FER15 7.5%
The recommended values are shown in the following table. For example, "10" corresponds to 5%.
1x FER2
2x FER4
4x FER4
8x FER6
16x FER6
32x FER10
If the forward target FER is large, the code channel power can be saved, but the Physical Channel
real FER will be increased and the link quality will be decreased, thus the data transmission
performance will be worsened. So in the heavy forward load network, the forward load can be
decreased by increasing the target FER appropriately.
If the forward target FER is small, the Physical Channel real FER will be decreased and thus the
data transmission performance will be improved. To ensure the low FER, the code channel power
will be consumed more. So in the light forward load network, the data transmission performance
can be improved by decreasing the target FER appropriately.

7. Remarks
None
3.8 Reverse SCH Closed-Loop Power Control Parameters
3.8.1 REVSCHPWRCTRLSW (Reverse SCH Power Control Switch)
1. Description
It controls whether to perform reverse SCH power synchronization.
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD BSCPWR: REVSCHPWRCTRLSW=YES;
Query: LST BSCPWR;

4. Range and Units
ON (ON)
OFF (OFF)
OFF
When the R-SCH close-loop power control function is enabled, the system can notify the mobile
to adjust the power offset of R-SCH relative to the reverse pilot according to the change of the
radio environment, thus the R-SCH FER will astringe to the target value better.
When the R-SCH close-loop power control function is disabled, the power offset of R-SCH
relative to the reverse pilot is fixed, thus the R-SCH FER can astringe to the target value in some
scene but not all the scenes (for example, the pilots in the active set of R-FCH are not same as the
pilots in the active set of R-SCH).

7. Remarks
None
3.8.2 RLGAINSCHPLT1X (1X R-SCH Gain Offset Relative to R-PICH) /

RLGAINSCHPLT2X (2X R-SCH Gain Offset Relative to R-PICH) /
RLGAINSCHPLT32X (32X R-SCH Gain Offset Relative to R-PICH)
1. Description
They indicate R-SCH power offsets relative to R-PICH, and sent to MS through the ESCAM. The
value of this parameter is part of R-PICH and R-SCH power, as shown in the following formula:
mean code channel output power (dBm) =
mean pilot channel output power (dBm)
+ 0.125 *( Nominal_Attribute_Gain[Rate, Frame Duration, Coding]
+ Attribute_Adjustment_Gain[Rate, Frame Duration, Coding]
+ Reverse_Channel_Adjustment_Gain[Channel]
- Multiple_Channel_Adjustment_Gain[Channel]
- Variable_Supplemental_Adjustment_Gain[Channel]
+ RLGAIN_TRAFFIC_PILOTs
+ RLGAIN_SCH_PILOT[Channel]s)
+ IFHHO_SRCH_CORR.
Here, Reverse_Channel_Adjustment_Gain[Channel] is RCAG.
2. Type
It is an Um interface parameter (ESCAM), used by the MS.
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD RCLPC:CN=901, SCTID=0, CRRID=10, RLGAINSCHPLT1X=8;
Query: V3R1/V3R6 - LST PWRINF: QRYINF= RCLPC;

4. Range and Units
-32 ~ 31, in the unit of 0.125 dB
Table 3-5 describes the recommended values for different rate.
Table 3-1 Recommended values
1x 8
2x 12
4x 16
8x 18
16x 20
32x 22
A large value of this parameter helps improve R-SCH transmission efficiency but affects the
reverse capacity. If the value of this parameter is too large, the uplink data transmission
performance can be improved but the reverse capacity will be decreased.
If the value of this parameter is small, the reverse SCH transmission performance may not be
ensured due to the shortage of the R-SCH code channel power.

7. Remarks
None
3.8.3 RCAGDWNSTEP (RCAG Down Step)
1. Description
This parameter specifies the RCAG down step of reverse SCH outer loop power control, it is a
factor of calculating the RCAG and determining the precise degree of RCAG adjustment.
2. Type
4. Range and Units
Modify: MOD RCLPC: CN=901, SCTID=0, CRRID=10, RCAGDWNSTEP=8;
4. Range and Units
0 ~ 255, in the unit of 0.125dB
1 (0.125dB)
If the value of this parameter is too small, it may limit the RCAG up adjustment in the bad radio
environment, and impact the uplink data transmission performance.
If the value of this parameter is too large, it may cause the range of the RCAG adjustment too
wide, and introduce the interference to the system.

7. Remarks
None
3.8.4 MAXRCAG (Max. RCAG Value)
1. Description
It indicates the max. value of RCAG of R-SCH outer loop power control.
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD RCLPC: CN=901, SCTID=0, CRRID=10, MAXRCAG=48;

4. Range and Units
-48 ~ 48, in the unit of 0.125 dB
24
If the value of this parameter is too small, it may limit the RCAG up adjustment in the bad radio
environment, and impact the uplink data transmission performance.

If the value of this parameter is too large, it may cause the range of the RCAG adjustment too
wide, and introduce the interference to the system.

7. Remarks
None
3.8.5 MINRCAG (Minimum RCAG Value)
1. Description
This parameter indicates the minimum value of the RCAG allowed.
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD RCLPC: CN=901, SCTID=0, CRRID=10, MINRCAG=-48;

4. Range and Units
-48 ~ 48, in the unit of 0.125 dB
-24
If this parameter is set to a great value, the RCAG cannot decrease normally so that the FER
cannot converge.If this parameter is set to a small value, the R-SCH transmit power can decrease
normally in good radio environment so that the FER can converge normally.
But if this parameter is set too small, in good radio environment, the R-SCH transmit power is set
very low. If the user experiences deep fading at this point, errors occur because the code channel
power of the R-SCH is insufficient. As a result, frames are lost on the air interface and the
transmission capability on reverse data services is affected.
7. Remarks
None
3.8.6 INITRCAG (Initial RCAG Value)
1. Description
This parameter indicates the initial value of the RCAG, and it takes effects before the adjustment
of or during the closure of the R-SCH closed loop power control function.
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD RCLPC: CN=901, SCTID=0, CRRID=10, INITRCAG=0;
Query: LST RRMINF: RRMINF=RCLPC;
4. Range and Units
-48 ~ 48, in the unit of 0.125 dB
0
A great parameter value may bring high offset of the R-SCH power to the reverse pilot power and
cause interference to the system.A small parameter value may bring low offset of the R-SCH
power to the reverse pilot power and lead to insufficient power R-SCH code channel. Therefore,
the reverse data transmission is affected.
7. Remarks
This parameter refers to the RCAG value used to calculate the R-SCH transmit power when the
R-SCH closed loop power control function is not enabled.
3.8.7 MINDTXTHRESH (Min. continuous DTX Threshold)
1. Description
If the number of successive DTX frames received by the BSC on the R-SCH is less than or equal
to this parameter, the excessive DTX frames are erasure frames.

2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD RCLPC: CN=901, SCTID=0, CRRID=10, MINDTXTHRESH=0;

4. Range and Units
0~15, in the unit of frame
0, which means fragmentary DTX frames received by the BSC will not be regarded as erasure
frames.
If the value of this parameter is too small, the impact of erasure frames been regarded as DTX
frames will not be avoided efficiently.
If the value of this parameter is too large, too many erasure frames are regarded as DTX frames, it
may cause power over-adjusted, and introduce interference to the system.

7. Remarks
If the number of successive DTX frames received by the BSC is N, then:
　 If N >= MAXDTXTHRESH, then (N - MAXDTXTHRESH) DTX frames will be regarded
as erasure frames;
　 If N > MINDTXTHRESH and N < MAXDTXTHRESH, then the successive N DTX
frames will be regarded as DTX frames;
　 If N <= MINDTXTHRESH, then the successive N DTX frames will be regarded as erasure
frames.
3.8.8 MAXDTXTHRESH (Max. continuous DTX Threshold)
1. Description
If the number of successive DTX frames received by the SCH is greater than the maximum
successive number of valid DTX frames, the excessive DTX frames are error frames. T
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD RCLPC: CN=901, SCTID=0, CRRID=10,MAXDTXTHRESH=15;

4. Range and Units
0 ~ 15, in the unit of frame
0, which means many DTX frames (for example, more than MINDTXTHRESH) received by the
BSC will be regarded as DTX frames not erasure frames.

If the value of this parameter is too small, too many erasure frames are regarded as DTX frames,
it may cause power over-adjusted, and introduce interference to the system.
If the value of this parameter is too large, it cannot solve the problem of the R-SCH code channel
power shortage by increasing the power in time, thus may cause the data transmission abort.
7. Remarks
SCHRELDTXDUR (DTX Duration) in the command MOD MCHM and MAXDTXTHRESH
(Max. continuous DTX Threshold) in the command MOD RCLPC has a
relation: MAXDTXTHRESH >= SCHRELDTXDUR

3.8.9 MAXRCAGADJSTEP (Max. RCAG Adjust Step)
1. Description
It indicates the maximum adjustment step of RCAG for R-SCH outer loop power control.
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD: MOD RCLPC: CN=901, SCTID=0, CRRID=10, MAXRCAGADJSTEP=8;

4. Range and Units
8
If the value of this parameter is too small, it cannot increase the power when radio environment
becoming bad suddenly, or decrease the power when radio environment becoming good suddenly,
thus may impact the data transmission performance.
If the value of this parameter is too large, that is no to limit the calculated adjustment value, it may
cause power over-adjusted of the R-SCH.

7. Remarks
None
3.8.10 REVDATSCHFER1X (Reverse 1X SCH Target FER) /

REVDATSCHFER2X (Reverse 2X SCH Target FER) / REVDATSCHFER4X
(Reverse 4X SCH Target FER) / REVDATSCHFER8X (Reverse 8X SCH
Target FER) / REVDATSCHFER16X (Reverse 16X SCH Target FER) /
REVDATSCHFER32X (Reverse 32X SCH Target FER)
1. Description
They indicate target FERs for R-SCHS at different rates.
2. Type
It is an Um interface (ESCAM) parameter used by the MS.
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD FER
Query: V3R1/V3R6 - LST PWRINF: QRYINF=FER;
4. Range and Units
Value FER Value FER
FER0 0.2% FER16 8.0%
FER1 0.5% FER17 8.5%
FER2 1.0% FER18 9.0%
FER3 1.5% FER19 9.5%
FER4 2.0% FER20 10.0%
FER5 2.5% FER21 11%
FER6 3.0% FER22 12%
FER7 3.5% FER23 13%
FER8 4.0% FER24 14%
FER9 4.5% FER25 15%
FER10 5.0% FER26 18%
FER11 5.5% FER27 21%
FER12 6.0% FER28 24%
FER13 6.5% FER29 27%
FER14 7.0% FER30 30%
FER15 7.5%
The recommended values are shown in the following table:
Rate Recommended values
1x 2
2x 4
4x 4
8x 6
16x 6
32x 10
If the reverse target FER is too small, the quality of reverse link may be good after the reverse
power control, and more reverse powers are required.
The values of the parameters can increase properly to save the MS power and improve the reverse
capacity, but the target FER cannot be greater than 15%.

7. Remarks
None
Chapter 4 Load Control and Load Management
Parameters
4.1 Access Channel Load Control Parameters
4.1.1 ACHLDCTRLSW (Access Channel Load Control Switch)
1. Description
It indicates whether BSC enables the access load control function
2. Type
3. Command Name
V3R6C02 - MOD ALDCTRL
V3R6C02 - LST RSMINF

4. Range and Units
ON (ON)
OFF (OFF)
OFF
None
7. Remarks
This switch must be used together with BTS Access Overload Control switch.
4.1.2 ALDCTRLSWT (Access Load Control Switch)
1. Description
This parameter is the access load control switch at the BTS side. If it is set to "ON", the BTS
reports the access load of each sector carrier to the BSC every two seconds. It is valid only when
the BSC enable the function.

2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: SET CBTSSIGSOFTPARA
Query: DSP CBTSCFG: CFGID=CBTSSIGSOFTPARA;

4. Range and Units
ON (ON)
OFF (OFF)
ON
None
7. Remarks
None
4.1.3 ACHHIGHTHR (Access Channel High Threshold)
1. Description
When the access channel load exceeds the threshold, and access load control is enabled, PSIST
(0-9) may be adjusted and the access to the overloaded Access Channel is controlled.
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD ALDCTRL
Query: V3R1/V3R6 - LST RSMINF: QRYINF=ALDCTRL

4. Range and Units
1~99, in the unit of percentage
80
None
7. Remarks
None
4.1.4 ACHLOWTHR (Access Channel Low Threshold)
1. Description
When the access channel load is lower than the threshold, and access load control is enabled,
PSIST (0-9) may be adjusted.

2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD ALDCTRL
Query: LST RRMINF: RRMINF=ALDCTRL;

4. Range and Units
60
None
7. Remarks
None
4.1.5 ACHUPSTEP (Psist Up Step)
1. Description
When the access channel load is higher than the threshold, the PSIST (0-9) may increase. This
parameter indicates the up-step.

2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD ALDCTRL
Query: V3R1/V3R6 - LST RSMINF: QRYINF=ALDCTRL

4. Range and Units
0~63
1
None
7. Remarks
None
4.1.6 ACHDOWNSTEP (Psist Down Step)
1. Description
When the access channel load is less than the threshold, the PSIST (0-9) may decrease. This
parameter indicates the down-step.

2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD ALDCTRL
Query: V3R1/V3R6 - LST RSMINF: QRYINF=ALDCTRL;

4. Range and Units
0~63
1
None
7. Remarks
None
4.1.7 ACHCOLLTHD (ACH Confliction Threshold)
1. Description
If the CRC of the access message fails, the BTS checks whether the energy of access channel
frames is below the threshold. If yes, it indicates a collision occurs; otherwise it indicates there is
no access message.
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: SET CBTSCDMA1XCTRLPARA
Query: DSP CBTSCFG: CFGID=CBTSCDMA1XCTRLPARA;

4. Range and Units
0~65535
3000
It is recommended that the parameter should not be modified.

None
7. Remarks
None
4.2 Forward Load Control Parameters
4.2.1 FWDLDCTRLSW (Forward Load Control Algorithm Selection)
1. Description
It indicates the forward load control algorithm to be used.
2. Type
3. Command Name

4. Range and Units
DUAL (DUAL_THRESHOLD)
ECIO (EC/IOR)
DUAL
None
7. Remarks
These two algorithms cannot be used at the same time.
4.2.2 FWDLDCTRLSWT (Forward Load Control Switch)
1. Description
It is the forward load control switch in the BTS side.
If it is set to ON, the limiting the code channel power function is enabled; if it is set to OFF, the
limiting the code channel power function is switched off.

2. Type
It is a BTS internal parameter.
3. Command Name
Modify: SET BTSSIGSOFTPARA: FWDLDCTRLSWT=OFF; (For 3612 BTS)
SET CBTSSIGSOFTPARA: FWDLDCTRLSWT= OFF; (For 3606 BTS)
SET MBTSSIGSOFTPARA: FWDLDCTRLSWT= OFF; (For 3601 BTS)
Query: DSP BTSCFG: CFGID=BTSSIGSOFTPARA: (For 3612 BTS)
DSP CBTSCFG: CFGID=CBTSSIGSOFTPARA: (For 3606 BTS)
DSP MBTSCFG: CFGID=BTSSIGSOFTPARA: (For 3601 BTS)

4. Range and Units
ON (ON)
OFF (OFF)
None
None
7. Remarks
The limiting the code channel power function is implemented in the BTS. If the load control
function is enabled, when the forward load is very heavy, the BTS can limit all the code channel
power, to avoid the system breakdown.
4.2.3 FWDTHRADJSW (Forward Threshold Adjust Switch)
1. Description
It indicates whether to allow the forward load threshold to perform dynamic adjustment.
2. Type
3. Command Name

4. Range and Units
ON (ON)
OFF (OFF)
ON
None
7. Remarks
When the EC/IOR algorithm is used, if this parameter is set to ON, it means the algorithm uses
the dynamic threshold; if this parameter is set to OFF, it means the algorithm uses the static
threshold, only the FWDINITTHR (Forward Initial Basic Threshold) is working, it is single
threshold actually.
4.2.4 FERLDCTRLSW (FER Load Control Switch)
1. Description
It is the switch of whether to enable the FER load control function.
2. Type
3. Command Name
V3R6C02-LST RSMINF
4. Range and Units
ON (ON)
OFF (OFF)
OFF
If the FER load control function is enabled, for new voice call the target FER is increased. It can
relax the rapid increasing load, increase the system capacity and increase the system reliability.
7. Remarks
If the FER load control function is enabled, for new voice call the target FER is increased. It can
relax the rapid increasing load, increase the system capacity and increase the system reliability,
but to some extent it will worsen the voice quality, thus it can only be used in the scene that the
forward load is heavy and the voice quality requirement is not high.
4.2.5 RSMDLDCTRLSW (Load Control Switch for Voice Rate Reduction
Mode)
1. Description
It is the switch of enabling the voice rate deduction mode load control function.
2. Type
3. Command Name
V3R6C02-LST RSMINF
4. Range and Units
ON (ON)
OFF (OFF)
OFF
None
7. Remarks
If the voice rate deduction mode load control function is enabled, for new voice call the FCH rate
is reduced. It can relax the rapid increasing load, increase the system capacity and increase the
system reliability, but to some extent it will worsen the voice quality, thus it can only be used in
the scene that the forward load is heavy and the voice quality requirement is not high.
4.2.6 DELLEGLDCTRLSW (Load Control Switch for Deleting Call Legs)
1. Description
It is the switch of deleting legs load control function.
2. Type
3. Command Name

V3R6C02-LST RSMINF
4. Range and Units
ON (ON)
OFF (OFF)
OFF
None
7. Remarks
If the parameter is set to ON, the branch of high code channel power can be deleted when the
system is approach to breakdown, to decrease the forward load and avoid the breakdown,
increase the system reliability. But it may trigger call drop and should be used carefully.
4.2.7 RSM_FWD_PWR_OVERLOAD_THRESH (Overload Threshold of

Forward Transmitting Power)
1. Description
If the forward transmission power is higher than this threshold, the forward admission flag of the
carrier is set to "Forbidden".
The parameter is valid in the Dual Threshold algorithm, invalid in the EcIor algorithm.
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD SOFTPARA: SRVMN=RRM, PRMNO=3, PRMV="0x7E";
Query: LST SOFTPARA

4. Range and Units
100~350
300
None
7. Remarks
The parameter is only valid in the Dual Threshold algorithm.
4.2.8 RSM_FWD_PWR_AVAILABLE_THRESH (Available Threshold of
Forward Transmitting Power)
1. Description
When the forward admission flag of the carrier is set to "Forbidden", if the forward transmission
power decreases and is lower than this threshold, restore the forward admission flag of the carrier
to "Allowed".
The parameter is valid in the Dual Threshold algorithm, invalid in the EcIor algorithm.
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD SOFTPARA: SRVMN=RRM, PRMNO=4, PRMV="0x64";
Query: LST SOFTPARA

4. Range and Units
60~200
160
None
7. Remarks
The parameter is only valid in the Dual Threshold algorithm.
4.2.9 FWDINITTHR (Forward Initial Basic Threshold)
1. Description
It indicates the initial value of admission control threshold allocated by voice service and data
service forward FCH. The parameter is valid in the EcIor algorithm.
In the Dual Threshold algorithm, forward SCH admission threshold, enabling/ disabling high
target FER load threshold, enabling/ disabling heavy traffic rate deduction mode load threshold
and enabling deleting legs load threshold are calculated from this parameter.
　 Forward SCH admission threshold = FWDINITTHR + FWDSTOBTHR
　 Enabling high target FER load threshold = FWDINITTHR + STHIFERRELLDTHR
　 Disabling high target FER load threshold = FWDINITTHR + SPHIFERRELLDTHR

　 Enabling high heavy traffic rate deduction mode load threshold = FWDINITTHR +
STRRMDRELLDTHR
　 Disabling high heavy traffic rate deduction mode threshold = FWDINITTHR +
SPRRMDRELLDTHR
　 Enabling deleting legs load threshold = FWDINITTHR + STDELLEGRELLDTHR

2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD FLDCTRL
Query: V3R1/V3R6 - LST RSMINF: QRYINF=FLDCTRL;

4. Range and Units
0~10000, in the unit of 0.10%
1300
The greater the value of this parameter, the more calls can be accessed. However, the system
breaks down easier.

7. Remarks
For the urban, the same frequency interference is relative large. It is recommended that the
parameter should be set small.
For the suburban, the same frequency interference is relative small. It is recommended that the
parameter should be set large.
The relative of Ec/Ior and the basic threshold is as follows:
Table 4-1 Ec/Ior (%) when Pilot Channel Gain = -7dB
Value of FWDINITTHR Ec/Ior(%) Ec/Ior(dB)
50% 40% -4
100% 20% -7
120% 16.7% -7.8
140% 14.3% -8.4
160% 12.5% -9
180% 11.1% -9.5
200% 10% -10
Ec/Ior is nearly equal to Ec/Io measured at the antenna. Ec indicates the pilot chip power, Ior
indicates the BTS forward Tx total power.
4.2.10 FWDMAXTHR (Forward Max. Basic Threshold)
1. Description
It indicates the maximum value of admission control threshold allocated by voice service and
data service forward FCH. The parameter is valid in the EcIor algorithm.
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD FLDCTRL

4. Range and Units
0~10000, in the unit of 0.10%
[Operating Range]
1600
breaks down easier.

7. Remarks
For the urban, the same frequency interference is relative large, it is recommended that the
For the suburban, the same frequency interference is relative small, it is recommended that the
4.2.11 FWDMINTHR (Forward Min. Basic Threshold)
1. Description
It indicates the minimum value of admission control threshold allocated by voice service and data
service forward FCH. The parameter is valid in the EcIor algorithm.

2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD FLDCTRL
Query V3R1/V3R6 - LST RSMINF: QRYINF=FLDCTRL;

4. Range and Units
0~10000, in the unit of 0.10%
1000
breaks down easier.

7. Remarks
For the urban, the same frequency interference is relative large, it is recommended that the
For the suburban, the same frequency interference is relative small, it is recommended that the
4.2.12 FWDSTOBTHR (Forward SCH to Basic Threshold)
1. Description
It indicates the offset of forward SCH admission threshold relative to the forward basic threshold.
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD FLDCTRL

4. Range and Units
-10000~0, in the unit of 0.10%
-100
The greater the value of this parameter, the lower the SCH establishment admission threshold is.
Therefore, less SCH can be established, but there are more transmission limits on the data service
and the system is securer, and vice versa.

7. Remarks
SCH establishment admission threshold is controlled by the value to forward basic threshold.
Therefore, when the basic threshold is adjusted dynamically, SCH establishment admission
threshold also must be adjusted.
The offset of forward SCH admission threshold relative to the forward basic threshold is negative,
that is, forward SCH admission threshold is lower than the forward basic threshold.
4.2.13 FWDSHOTOBTHR (Forward Soft Handoff to Basic Threshold)
1. Description
It indicates the offset of soft handoff admission threshold relative to the forward basic threshold.
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD FLDCTRL

4. Range and Units
0~10000, in the unit of 0.10%
300
The greater the value of this parameter, the higher the soft handoff admission threshold is.
Therefore, higher soft handoff requirements can be met and there are fewer call drops caused by
the soft handoff limit, and vice versa.

7. Remarks
Soft handoff admission threshold are controlled by the value to forward basic threshold.
Therefore, when the basic threshold is adjusted dynamically, soft handoff admission threshold
also must be adjusted.

The offset of forward soft handoff admission threshold relative to the forward basic threshold is
positive, that is, forward soft handoff admission threshold is higher than the forward basic
threshold.
4.2.14 FWDFERTHR (Bad FER Threshold)
1. Description
When the forward FER of this call exceeds this threshold, the FER of the call is regarded as bad,
otherwise it is regarded as good.

2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD FLDCTRL
Query: V3R1/V3R6- LST RSMINF: QRYINF=FLDCTRL;

4. Range and Units
5
If the value of the parameter is too large, when the service quality is very bad, it is regarded as bad
leg, so the bad FER proportion is low, and vice versa.

7. Remarks
The parameter must be larger than FWDVCFCHLOADFER1.
4.2.15 FWDTHRADJMINNUM (Forward Threshold Adjust Min. FCH

Number)
1. Description
It indicates the minimum number of branches required when actual forward bad FER proportion
must be calculated.
When the number of branches on a carrier exceeds the threshold, the system adjusts forward basic
threshold, SCH establishment admission threshold and soft handoff admission threshold based on
FWDFERTHR (Bad FER Threshold) and FWDFERPROP (Bad FER Proportion).

2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD FLDCTRL

4. Range and Units
0–255, in the unit of branch
10
If the value of this parameter is large, the dynamic admission control has not be implemented
even the system load is very high, thus it cannot get a balance between the service quality and the
capacity.
If the value of this parameter is small, it may cause the unwanted dynamic adjustment, adjust the
admission threshold to the minimum value, and reject the call access.
7. Remarks
If the actual number is less than the value of this parameter, the load threshold is not adjusted.
4.2.16 EPACAVAL (EPACA Resource Threshold)
1. Description
This parameter is used in the Enhanced Priority Access and Channel Assignment (EPACA)
function. When the BSC receives the call setup request or paging response from the MS, it
invokes internal functions to check the usage of system resources. If the forward load exceeds the
value of this parameter, the system returns the reason why no resource is available. Then the BSC
notifies the MSC, and the MSC determines whether to release some calls for priority subscribers.
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD FLDCTRL

4. Range and Units
0~65535, in the unit of 0.10%
2000
None
7. Remarks
The load fluctuates constantly. If the parameter is set too high, the MSC will not release calls for
priority subscribers; therefore the priority subscribers could not connect to the network at this
point. If the parameter is set too small, the MSC will release calls unnecessarily; the traffic
statistics counters are affected.
4.3 Reverse Load Control Parameters
4.3.1 REVLDCTRLSW (Reverse Load Control Algorithm Selection)
1. Description
It indicates the mode of reverse load control: Equivalent Users mode or RSSI Rise mode.
2. Type
3. Command Name
V3R6C02 - MOD RLDCTRL

4. Range and Units
EQUSERS (EQUIVALENT USERS)
RSSIRISE (RSSI RISE)

EQUSERS
None
7. Remarks
None
4.3.2 REVMAXUSER (Max Number of Equivalent Reverse Channels)
1. Description
It specifies the maximum number of equivalent reverse channel number of RC3 voice FCH
channel number. The reverse load is not easy to be measured exactly, so the equivalent reverse
channel number is used for admission control.
When implementing the reverse admission control, calculate the current equivalent reverse
channels and the equivalent reverse channels to be assigned, if the sum is larger than
REVMAXUSER, the new call is rejected, otherwise the new call is admitted.
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD CHINF
Query: V3R1/V3R6 - LST CHMINF: QRYINF=CHINF;

4. Range and Units
0~255
75
When implementing the voice or data service capacity test, increase the parameter will increase
the capacity, but it will decrease the reliability of the system, so in the commercial network, this
parameter should not be modified.

7. Remark
None
4.3.3 LOWUSERNUM (Low User Number)
1. Description
When the number of reverse equivalent users is less than the threshold, the reverse load is
regarded as light.
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD RLDCTRL
Query: V3R1/V3R6 - LST RSMINF: QRYINF=RLDCTRL;

4. Range and Units
0–255, in the unit of user
20
None
7. Remarks
None
4.3.4 LOWMINTHR (Low Min. Threshold)
1. Description
It indicates the minimum RSSI rise when the number of reverse equivalent users is less than the
threshold of low load users.
The call is admitted if the RSSI is lower than the threshold.

2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD RLDCTRL

4. Range and Units
0~600, in the unit of 0.1 dBm
599
None
7. Remarks
RSSI rise is the RSSI relative to background noise (noise floor) and calculated based on current
RSSI measurement and noise floor.
4.3.5 LOWMAXTHR (Low Max. Threshold)
1. Description
It indicates the maximum RSSI rise when the number of reverse equivalent users is less than the
threshold of low load users.
The call is not admitted when the RSSI is higher than the threshold.
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD RLDCTRL

4. Range and Units
0~600, in the unit of 0.1 dBm
600
None
7. Remarks
See the LOWMINTHR (Low Min. Threshold).
4.3.6 MIDMINTHR (Mid Min. Threshold)
1. Description
It indicates the minimum RSSI rise when the number of reverse equivalent users is within the
medium load area.

2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD RLDCTRL

4. Range and Units
0–600, in the unit of 0.1 dBm
599
None
7. Remarks
4.3.7 MIDMAXTHR (Mid Max. Threshold)
1. Description
It indicates the maximum RSSI rise when the number of reverse equivalent users is within the
medium load area.

2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD RLDCTRL
Query: LST RRMINF: RRMINF=RLDCTRL;

4. Range and Units
600
None
7. Remarks
4.3.8 HIGHMINTHR (High Min. Threshold)
1. Description
It indicates the minimum RSSI rise when the number of reverse equivalent users is within the
heavy load range.

2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD RLDCTRL

4. Range and Units
150
None
7. Remarks
See the LOWMINTHR (Low Min Threshold).
4.3.9 HIGHMAXTHR (High Max. Threshold)
1. Description
It indicates the maximum RSSI rise when the number of reverse equivalent users is within the
heavy load range.

2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD RLDCTRL

4. Range and Units
200
None
7. Remarks
See the LOWMINTHR (Low Min Threshold).
4.3.10 FERMINNUM (FER Stat Min. FCH Number)
1. Description
It indicates the minimum number of branches when calculating the actual reverse bad FER
proportion.
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD RLDCTRL

4. Range and Units
0~255, in the unit of branch
10
None
7. Remarks
None
4.3.11 BADFERTHR (Bad FER Threshold)
1. Description
When the reverse FER exceeds the threshold, the FER is regarded as bad.
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD RLDCTRL

4. Range and Units
5
None
7. Remarks
None
4.3.12 BADFERPROP (Bad FER Proportion)
1. Description
It indicates the proportion of reverse bad FER branch used for adjusting reverse admission.
If the proportion of reverse bad FER branch is greater than the value of this parameter, new calls
are not admitted. Otherwise, the new calls are admitted.

2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD RLDCTRL

4. Range and Units
20
None
7. Remarks
None
4.4 Voice Access Preferential Parameters
4.4.1 VOICEACCSW (Voice Service Access Priority Switch)
1. Description
It is the switch of voice access of a specified carrier preferentially.
2. Type
It is an internal parameter.
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD CHINF

4. Range and Units
ON (ON)
OFF (OFF)
5.Recommend Value
OFF
This is the voice service preferential function based on the Walsh code. When the function is
enabled, if the SCH occupied enough Walsh code, release the SCH in time to avoid the voice calls
congestion due to the shortage of the Walsh code, but it will decrease the transmission rate of the
data service calls.

7. Remarks
This function is applicable to the scene that the voice service and the data service coexist in the
network, the Walsh code is limited, and the voice service is prior to the data service.
4.4.2 FWDSTOBTHR (F-SCH To Basic Threshold)
1. Description
It is the offset of the forward SCH admission threshold relative to the forward basic threshold. It
is expressed in the permillage of the sector power.

2. Type
It is an internal parameter.
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD FLDCTRL
Query: V3R1/V3R6 - LST CHMINF: QRYINF= FLDCTRL;

4. Range and Units
-10000~0, in the unit of 0.1%
5.Recommend Value
-100
FWDSTOBTHR should be configured according to the load fluctuation degree. When the
forward load is heavier than FWDSTOBTHR, the system should release the SCH power to
ensure the access of the voice calls preferentially, but it will decrease the transmission rate of the
data service calls.

7. Remarks
This function is applicable to the scene that the voice service and the data service coexist in the
network, the forward power is limited, and the voice service is prior to the data service.
4.5 RC Self-Adaptive assignment Parameters
4.5.1 RCVOICESW (Voice RC Switch)
1. Description
The parameter specifies the control switch of determining voice service assignment for the RC
type.
2. Type
This parameter is an internal BSC parameter.
3. Command Name
Modify: V2R2/V2R3 - MOD MCHM; V3R1-MOD CHM;
V3R6C02 - MOD CHINF
Query: V2R2/V2R3 - LST MCHM; V3R1-LST CHM;
V3R6C02 - LST CHMINF

4. Range and Unit
RC3– RC3 only
RC4– RC4 only
ARC–RC Adaptive
RC3
6. Setting Tradeoff
None.
7. Remarks
None.
4.5.2 RCDATAFCHSW (Data FCH RC Switch)
1. Description
The parameter specifies the control switch of determining data service FCH assignment for the
RC type.
2. Type
3. Command Name
V3R6C02 - MOD CHINF

4. Range and Unit
RC3– RC3 only
RC4– RC4 only
ARC–RC Adaptive
RC3
6. Setting Tradeoff
None.
7. Remarks
None.
4.5.3 RCDATASCHSW (Data SCH RC Switch)
1. Description
The parameter specifies the control switch of determining data service SCH assignment for the
RC type.
2. Type
3. Command Name
V3R6C02 - MOD CHINF

4. Range and Unit
RC3– RC3 only
RC4– RC4 only
ARC–RC Adaptive
RC3
6. Setting Tradeoff
None.
7. Remarks
None.
4.6 Walsh Allocation Strategy
4.6.1 WALSHALLOCATE (Walsh allocation strategy)
1. Description
This parameter is the switch for selecting the Walsh allocation strategy.
2. Type
BSC internal parameter.
Parameter layer: ordinary users.

3. Command Name
Modify: V3R1/V3R6 -MOD CHINF
Query: V3R1/V3R6 -LST CHINF

4. Range and Unit
Buddy (Buddy algorithm)
CODTRBL (code balancing algorithm)
TQCODTRBL (3/4 code balancing algorithm)
HFCODTRBL (1/2 code balancing algorithm)

Buddy
6. Setting Tradeoff
None
7. Remarks
V300R006C01 and later versions support selection of a Walsh allocation strategy. The earlier
versions only support Buddy algorithm.
4.7 Closing Idle Sectors
4.7.1 AUTODWNCDMACH (support of auto blocking of carriers)
1. Description
This is a switch for specifying whether automatic blocking of carriers is supported. If automatic
blocking of carriers is supported, the system automatically selects the carrier according to the
sector load and blocks and unblocks the carrier.

2. Type

3. Command Name
Modify: MOD CDMACH
Query: LST CDMACH

4. Range and Unit
YES (supported) / NO (not supported)
NO (not supported)
6. Setting Tradeoff
None
7. Remarks
None
4.7.2 AUTODWNFWDEQLCHANTHD (number of equivalent FCHs threshold
for the CDMA2000 1X to automatically block carriers)
1. Description
This parameter is the number of equivalent FCHs threshold for the CDMA2000 1X to
automatically block carriers. It is used to judge the sector load.

2. Type

3. Command Name
Modify: MOD CELL
Query: LST CELL

4. Range and Unit
0–255
20
6. Setting Tradeoff
The larger the value, the easier to trigger the automatic blocking of the carriers.
7. Remarks
None
4.7.3 AUTODWNCOUNTTHD (count threshold for the CDMA2000 1X to

automatically block carriers)
1. Description
This parameter is the count threshold for the CDMA2000 1X to automatically block carriers.
2. Type

3. Command Name
Modify: MOD CELL
Query: LST CELL

4. Range and Unit
1–65535
600
6. Setting Tradeoff
A small value easily triggers the automatic blocking of carriers.
7. Remarks
None
4.7.4 UNBLKFWDEQLCHANTHD (number of equivalent FCHs threshold for

the CDMA2000 1X to automatically unblock carriers)
1. Description
This parameter specifies the number of equivalent FCHs for the CDMA2000 1X to automatically
unblock carriers.
2. Type

3. Command Name
Modify: MOD CELL
Query: LST CELL

4. Range and Unit
1–255
40
6. Setting Tradeoff
The smaller the value, the easier to trigger the automatic unblocking of the carriers.
7. Remarks
None
4.7.5 TRGARFCN (target frequency sequence for automatic blocking carriers)
1. Description
The system selects a carrier to block according to the sequence of the target frequencies.
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD BSCRSM
Query: LST BSCRSM

4. Range and Unit
The sequence is in the format ARFCN&BANDCLASS, ARFCN&BANDCLASS,...
Frequency range: 0–2047.
Band range:0–17.
None
6. Setting Tradeoff
None
7. Remarks
None
4.7.6 STRTIME (start time of the idle time to auto-block carriers)
1. Description
This parameter specifies the start time of the idle time.
2. Type

3. Command Name
Modify: MOD CELL
Query: LST CELL

4. Range and Unit
TIME0 (0:00) TIME1 (0:30) TIME2 (1:00) TIME3 (1:30)

TIME2 (1:00)
6. Setting Tradeoff
None
7. Remarks
The carriers can be blocked only when the system is idle.
4.7.7 STPTIME (end time of the idle time to auto-block carriers)
1. Description
This parameter specifies the end time of the idle time.
2. Type

3. Command Name
Modify: MOD CELL
Query: LST CELL

4. Range and Unit
TIME0 (0:00) TIME1 (0:30) TIME2 (1:00) TIME3 (1:30) …

TIME2 (1:00)
6. Setting Tradeoff
None
7. Remarks
The carriers can be blocked only when the system is idle.
Chapter 5 Paging and Access Parameters
5.1 Access Macro Diversity
5.1.1 ACMACRODIVSW (Access Macro Diversity Switch)
1. Description
This parameter sets the switch of the access macro diversity. It indicates whether the access
macro diversity function is enabled.

2. Type
The parameter is a BSC internal algorithm parameter.
3. Command Name
Modify: V3R1/V3R6 -MOD CHM
Query: V3R1/V3R6 -LST CHM

4. Range and unit
YES/NO
YES
It is recommended to enable this function. Thus the access successful ratio can be improved.
7. Remark
None
5.1.2 MBRANUMAC (Maximum Number of Access Macro Diversity

Branches)
1. Description
This parameter indicates the maximum number of branches of the access macro diversity.
2. Type
The parameter is a module level parameter.
3. Command Name
Query: V3R1/V3R6 -LST CHM

4. Range and unit
1–6
3
If the value of the parameter you set is too large, the successful ratio of the access is not greatly
improved. The resource is wasted.
The judgment of the active set of the access macro diversity is the same as that of the active set of
the basic handoff. For the parameter settings, refer to the related basic soft handoff contents.
7. Remark
None
5.2 Access Handoff
5.2.1 NBRSENTRY (Neighbor Set Access Entry HO Info Included Indicator)
1. Description
Access entry handoff information included flag of neighbor set
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD ESPM

4. Range and unit
YES/NO
NO
The parameter is a BSC level parameter. If this parameter is changed, all sector carriers in the
BSC are affected. Therefore,
　 If a large amount of 95 terminals exist in the network, disable this function. That is, set the
parameter to NO.
　 If only 2000 mobile stations exist in the network, enable this function. That is, set the
parameter to YES.
7. Remark
When many 95 terminals exist in the network, enabling this function may cause that the 95
terminals fail in the access handoff. When most of the terminals in the network are cdma 2000
terminals, enabling the function main efficiently improve the access successful ratio in the
unstably forward coverage area.
5.2.2 NBRSETACSINF (Neighbor Set Access Handoff Information Included

Indicator)
1. Description
Access handoff information included flag
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD ESPM

4. Range and unit
YES/NO
NO
The parameter is a BSC level parameter. If this parameter is changed, all sector carriers in the
BSC are affected. Therefore,
　 If a large amount of 95 terminals exist in the network, disable this function. That is, set the
parameter to no.
　 If only 2000 mobile stations exist in the network, enable this function. That is, set the
parameter to yes.
7. Remark
5.2.3 ACSHO (Access Handoff Permitted Identification)
1. Description
Access handoff permitted identification
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD ESPM

4. Range and unit
YES/NO
NO

7. Remark
If the NGHBR_SET_ACCESS_INFO is set to 1, the parameter must be set. If the
NGHBR_SET_ACCESS_INFO is set to 0, the parameter can be ignored. Refer to the parameter
NGHBR_SET_ACCESS_INFO.
5.2.4 ACSPRBHO (Access Probe Handoff Permitted Identification)
1. Description
The access probe handoff permitted identification
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD ESPM

4. Range and unit
YES/NO
If a large amount of 95 terminals exist in the network, disable this function. That is, set the
parameter to NO. If only 2000 mobile stations exist in the network, enable this function. That is,
set the parameter to YES.


7. Remark
If the NBRSETACSINF is set to YES, the parameter must be set. If the NBRSETACSINF is set
to NO, the parameter can be ignored. Refer to the parameter NGHBR_SET_ACCESS_INFO.
5.2.5 PLTRPT (Pilot Reporting Indicator)
1. Description
This parameter indicates the mobile stations that whether the additional pilot information need to
be included in all access channel messages. If the parameter is set to that the additional pilot
information is not included in all access channel messages, the mobile station only need to take
the additional pilot information whose pilot strength exceeds the T_ADD in the origination
message and paging response message. Otherwise, the mobile station takes the additional
information of the pilot whose pilot strength exceeds the T_ADD in all access channel messages.
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD ESPM

4. Range and unit
YES/NO
The recommended value is no. It indicates that the mobile station only needs to take the
additional information of the pilot whose pilot strength exceeds the T_ADD in the Origination
Message and the Paging Response Message.

None
7. Remark
None
5.2.6 ACCHOLSTUPD (Access Handoff List Update Permitted Identification)
1. Description
The parameter is the access handoff list update permitted identification. The identification
indicates that whether the mobile station is permitted to update the access handoff list during an
access probe procedure. 1 indicates permitted. 0 indicates forbidden. If the
ACCESS_PROBE_HO is set to 1, the field must be set.

2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD ESPM

4. Range and unit
YES/NO
The Recommended Value is no. That is, the mobile station is not permitted to update its access
handoff list during the access attempts.

None
7. Remark
None
5.2.7 MAXNUMPRBHO (Maximum Number of Access Probe Handoff

Permitted)
1. Description
The parameter indicates the maximum number of times that the MS processes the access probe
handoff.
If ACCESS_PROBE_HO is set to 0, ignore the value. That is, only when the access probe
handoff is allowed to be processed, the parameter needs to be set. Refer to the parameter
ACCESS_PROBE_HO.
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD ESPM

4. Range and unit
1–7
1
None
7. Remark
None
5.2.8 AEHOFLG (Access Entry HO Permission)
1. Description
This parameter indicates that whether the mobile station is permitted to process the access entry
handoff to the specified neighbor. The parameter must be used with the MOD ESPM command.
Refer to the parameter NGHBR_SET_ENTRY_INFO.

2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD NBRPARA;
Query: LST NBRPARA

4. Range and unit
YES/NO
NO
Set the parameter according to the actual networking requirement. If a large amount of 95
terminals of some carrier frequency exist, disable the function to reduce the failure rate for the
access handoff. If most of the terminals of some carrier frequency are 2000 terminals, enable the
function to improve the access successful ratio of the unstably forward coverage area.
7. Remark
None
5.2.9 AHOFLG (Access Handoff and Access Probe Handoff Permission)
1. Description
This parameter indicates that whether the mobile station is permitted to process the access
handoff and access probe handoff to the specified neighbor. The parameter must be used with the
MOD ESPM command. Refer to the parameter NGHBR_SET_ENTRY_INFO.

2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD NBRPARA;
Query: LST NBRPARA;

4. Range and unit
YES/NO
NO
Set the parameter according to the actual networking requirement. If a large amount of 95
terminals of some carrier frequency exist, disable the function to reduce the failure rate for the
access handoff. If most of the terminals of some carrier frequency are 2000 terminals, enable the
function to improve the access successful ratio of the unstably forward coverage area.
7. Remark
None
5.3 Multiple Carrier Assignment
5.3.1 ASSALW1X (Carrier Assign Allowed Indicator of CDMA2000 1X)
1. Description
The parameter is the switch of the carrier assignment algorithm. The carrier assignment function
can be used only in the multi-carrier network. The carrier assignment function consists of the
Services_Prior Assignment, MS_Prev_Prior Assignment, 　 Access carrier assignment, and
RSSI assignment. To use the carrier assignment functions mentioned here, switch on the switch
firstly.
2. Type
This parameter is a cell level parameter.
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD CELL
Query: LST CELL

4. Range and unit
YES/NO
The recommended value is NO.
If a multiple carrier cell wants to use the carrier assignment strategy, enable this function.
Otherwise, disable this function.

None
7. Remark
None
5.3.2 REVRSSICARRASSNSW (RSSI Carrier Assignment Switch)
1. Description
When some reverse interference exists in some frequency of the multi-carrier network, enable the
RSSI carrier assignment to assign the call to the carrier without interference or with less
interference to ensure the call quality.

2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD CELL
Query: LST CELL

4. Range and unit
ON2 - the algorithm based on the RSSI relative value difference and equivalent user number
difference
ON1 - the algorithm based on the RSSI absolute value
OFF – OFF
ON2: the algorithm based on the RSSI relative value difference and the equivalent user number
difference
z 　 When no reverse interference exists, switch off this function (OFF).
z 　 When long-term reverse interferences exist, before finding out the interference source or
clearing the interferences, switch on this function. Switch off this function after the interferences
are cleared out.
z 　 When the frequently non-periodical burst interferences exist, switch on this function.
z 　 When using the RSSI carrier assignment function, it is recommended to use the algorithm
based on the RSSI relative value difference and the equivalent user number difference (ON2).
None
7. Remark
If you want to use the reverse RSSI carrier assignment function, switch on the carrier assignment
allowed switch first. Then the reverse RSSI carrier assignment function is able to take effective.
The reverse RSSI carrier assignment function can only check the interference source and be used
as a temporary mitigation solution during the clearing of the interference.
5.3.3 HARDASSIGNTYPE (Priority Assignment Type)
1. Description
This parameter is the priority switch of the Services_Prior Assignment and the MS_Prev_Prior
Assignment algorithm.
2. Type
This parameter is a module level parameter.
3. Command Name
Query: V3R1/V3R6 -LAT CHM

4. Range and unit
ONLY_DATA – ASSIGN ACCORDING TO DATA SERVICE
BOTH_VOICE_DATA –– ASSIGN ACCORDING TO VOICE AND DATA SERVICE
MS_PREV_ASSIGN –ASSIGN ACCORDING TO MS VERSION
NULL – NO PRIORITY ASSIGNMENT

NULL
In the multiple-carrier network, the multiple-carrier assignment strategy should be made
according to the actual wireless environment, traffic model, and networking.

z 　 When only voice services exist or very few data services exist in the network, the
assignment needs not to be processed according to the service Type.
z 　 When many data services exist in the network, assign the data services to a separate carrier
(ONLY_DATA or BOTH_VOICE_DATA) to ensure the operation of the voice services.

Huawei equipment support both 95 mobile stations and 2000 mobile stations. When the Huawei
equipment is used for the networking, do not use the MS_Prev_Prior Assignment. But in the
following two instances, the MS_Prev_Prior Assignment needs to be used:
z 　 When the network used both Huawei equipment and the equipment made by other
manufactories and the equipment made by other manufactories cannot support both the 95
mobile stations and 2000 mobiles, configure MS_Prev_Prior Assignment in the border sector.
z 　 Some 95 mobile stations exist in the network and the hard handoff is configured in the
multiple-carrier border sectors. The 95 mobile stations support less hard handoff algorithm than
the 2000 mobile stations. The hard handoff successful ratio is low. So the 95 mobile stations
should be assigned to the basic carrier. Basic carrier of the border sectors can be configured as the
95 mobile stations priority carrier.

7. Remark
The Services_Prior Assignment and MS_Prev_Prior Assignment algorithm can take effect only
when ASSALW1X (Carrier Assign Allowed Indicator of CDMA2000 1X) and
HARDASSIGNTYPE(Priority Assignment Type) are switched on.
This parameter is set in the SPU module. It affects all the calls in the SPU module.
5.3.4 ASSIGNACCFREQSW (Switch for the Priority of Hard Assignment

Access Carrier)
1. Description
This parameter refers to the switch to indicate the priority of access carriers during hard
assignment.
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD CHINF

4. Range and unit
ON/OFF
ON
None
7. Remark
It is not recommended to modify this parameter value.
5.3.5 CARRASSGNVAL (Carrier Assign Threshold)
1. Description
This parameter is used in the carrier assignment. If the carrier assignment allowed switch is set
ON, when processing the access admission judgment, if the load (the forward load) of the current
sector carrier is not greater than the threshold, the Services_Prior Assignment, MS_Prev_Prior
Assignment and Access Carrier Assignment algorithm can be implemented. Otherwise, calls
are assigned to the carrier with high priority and light load to balance the load of the carriers.
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD CHINF

4. Range and unit
0–1000
80
None
7. Remark
None
5.3.6 MSPREVASSGNTP (Assign MS Version Priority Type)
1. Description
The parameter indicates that whether the IS95 mobile stations or the IS2000 mobile stations have
the access priority for a sector carrier. For example, when the carrier assignment function is
enabled and the type of the carrier assignment is MS_Prev_Prior Assignment, if the carrier P1 is
set as the carrier that the 2000 mobile stations have the priority to access, when a 2000 mobile
station accesses, the 2000 mobile station is assigned to the P1 preferentially no matter which
carrier the 2000 mobile station accesses from. Only when the load of the P1 exceeds the threshold,
the mobile station is assigned to other carriers according to the load sharing principle.
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD CHINF

4. Range and unit
MS2000_PRIO – PRIORITY of 2000 MS
MS95_PRIO –PRIORITY of 95 MS
NO_PRIO – NO PRIORITY
NO_PRIO
None
7. Remark
The MS_Prev_Prior Assignment function can take effect only when ASSALW1X (Carrier
Assign Allowed Indicator of CDMA2000 1X) and HARDASSIGNTYPE(Priority Assignment
Type) are switched on.
5.3.7 SERVASSGNTP (Assign Service Priority Type])
1. Description
The parameter specifies that whether the voice service or the data service has the access priority
for a sector carrier. For example, when the carrier assignment function is enabled and the type of
the carrier assignment is Services_Prior assignment, if the carrier P1 is set as the carrier that the
voice service has the priority to access, when a mobile station processes a voice call, the mobile
station is assigned to the P1 preferentially no matter which carrier the mobile station starts the
voice call from. Only when the load of the P1 exceeds the threshold, the mobile station is
assigned to other carriers according to the load balance principle.
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD CHINF

4. Range and unit
VOICE_PRIO – VOICE SERVICE PRIORITY
DATA_PRIO - DATA SERVICE PRIORITY
NO_PRIO - NO PRIORITY
NO_PRIO
In the multiple-carrier network, the multiple carrier assignment strategy should consider the
actual wireless environment, traffic model, and networking.

　 If only voice services exist in the network or only few data services exist in the network, the
assignment is not needed to be processed according to the service Type(2:NO_PRIO).
　 When a large amount of the data services exist, the data services may affect the voice
services. Thus, the data services need to be assigned to a separate carrier. The carrier that
bears the data services should be set as the data service priority carrier (1: DATA_PRIO).
The carrier that bears the voice services should be set as the voice service priority carrier (0:
VOICE_PRIO).
7. Remark
The MS_Prev_Prior Assignment function can take effect only when ASSALW1X (Carrier
Assign Allowed Indicator of CDMA2000 1X) and HARDASSIGNTYPE(Priority Assignment
Type) are switched on..
5.3.8 PLTPL (Pilot Priority Level)
1. Description
When there are multiple carriers that meet the priority requirement, the carrier priority function
selects the carrier with the highest priority and lowest load. For example, when a voice service
accesses, there are two voice service priority carriers, the carrier which has higher priority is
selected. If the two carriers have the same priority, the carrier with lower load is selected.
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD CDMACH
Query: LST CDMACH;

4. Range and unit
1–6
1
None
7. Remark
Generally, the carrier priority function is not recommended to be used in the multiple-carrier
network except in the case of special configuration strategy. The priorities of every carrier are
recommended to be set to the same value (default value is 1).
5.3.9 REVRSSIINTERFTHRESH (Reverse Interference Occurrence

Threshold)
1. Description
The threshold is used to judge whether the interference exists. If the number of sampling exceeds
the reverse RSSI higher threshold is less than the reverse interference threshold, the reverse
interference does not exist in the sector carrier. Otherwise, the reverse interference exists in the
sector carrier.
2. Type
This parameter is the carrier level parameter.
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD RLDCTRL
Query:V3R1/V3R6- LST RSMINF: QRYINF=RLDCTRL;
4. Range and unit
1–600
5
None
7. Remark
The threshold value is less than or equal to the REVRSSISTATWINSIZE (Reverse RSSI
Statistic Window Size).

The reverse RSSI carrier assignment function can take effect only when ASSALW1X (Carrier
Assign Allowed Indicator of CDMA2000 1X) and HARDASSIGNTYPE(Priority Assignment 2.
Type) are switched on.
5.3.10 Configuration Examples
Example 1
Two carriers, the 95 mobile station is assigned to the carrier 283, and the 2000 mobile station is
assigned to any carrier.

Method 1: the carrier 283 is configured as that the IS95S mobile station is preferential and the
carrier 201 is not configured.
/*Switch on the carrier assignment allowed switch*/
MOD CELL: CN=10, SCTID=0, CASN=YES, REVRSSICARRASSNSW=OFF;
/*Switch on Services_Prior Assignment, MS_Prev_Prior Assignment*/
MOD MCHM: MN=0, HARDASSIGNTYPE=MS_PREV_ASSIGN;
/*The carrier_id of the carrier 283 is 10, the carrier 283 is set as that the IS95S mobile station is
preferential, the threshold of the carrier assignment is set to 80%*/
MOD CHINF: CN=10, SCTID=0, CRRID=10, CARRASSGNVAL=80,
MSPREVASSGNTP=MS95_PRIO;
/*The carrier_id of the carrier 201 is 11, the carrier assignment threshold of the carrier 201 is set
to 80%*/
MOD CHINF: CN=10, SCTID=0, CRRID=10, CARRASSGNVAL=80;
Method 2: Both carriers are configured as the access carrier preferential. The mobile station idle
state residence strategy should be configured. The 95 mobile station resides in carrier 283 in idle
state. The 2000 mobile station resides in any two carriers. To make the 95 mobile station resides
in the different carrier from that the 2000 mobile station resides, the CCLM carries only the
carrier 283 and the ECCLM carries only the 283 or 201. Different mobile stations process
different HASH according to the different messages received. Thus, the different mobile stations
reside in different carrier.
/*Switch off the Services_Prior Assignment switch, the Access Priority Assignment is set by
default*/
MOD MCHM: MN=0, HARDASSIGNTYPE=NULL;
/*Set the "Extended CDMA channel list message sending identification" to YES (send)*/
MOD ECCLM: SUBITEM=SCT_CLASS, CN=10, SCTID=0,
RCQPCHSELINCL=NO, EXTCDMACHLST=YES;
/*For carrier 283, set "Whether to send in CCLM" to YES (send), set "Whether to send in
ECCLM" to YES; for carrier 201, set "Whether to send in CCLM" to NO, set "Whether to send in
ECCLM" to YES*/
MOD CDMACH: CN=10, SCTID=0, CRRID=10, CCLMFLG=YES,
ECCLMFLG=YES;
MOD CDMACH: CN=10, SCTID=0, CRRID=11, CCLMFLG=NO,
ECCLMFLG=YES;
/*Set "CDMA channel number" in the synchronous channel message to 283*/
MOD SCHM: CN=10, SCTID=0, CRRID=10, CDMABSN=283;

Example 2
Two carriers, the data service is assigned to the carrier 201 and the voice service is assigned to the
carrier 283.
/*Switch on the Services_Prior Assignment switch */
MOD MCHM: MN=0, HARDASSIGNTYPE=BOTH_VOICE_DATA;
/*Set 283 as the carrier that the voice service has the priority, set 201 as the carrier that the data
service has the priority, and set the carrier assignment threshold to 80%*/
SERVASSGNTP=VOICE_PRIO;
SERVASSGNTP=DATA_PRIO;
Example 3
Two carriers, the reverse RSSI carrier assignment switch is enabled.
/*Switch on the carrier assignment allowed and the reverse RSSI carrier assignment. For the
RSSI carrier assignment algorithm, choose 2 (based on the RSSI relative value difference and the
difference of the number of equivalent users)*/
MOD CELL: CN=10, SCTID=0, CASN=YES, REVRSSICARRASSNSW=ON2;

Example 4
Two carriers; mobile stations make calls in the carrier 283 if possible; when the load of 283
exceeds the threshold of the carrier assignment, the carrier 201 shares the load.
Every carrier is configured with the access carrier priority assignment. The mobile stations in idle
state reside in carrier 283.
(1) Both carrier 283 and carrier 201 are configured with the paging channel.
/*Switch on the carrier assignment allowed*/
/*Switch off the Services_Prior assignment, the access priority is set by default*/
/*Set the carrier assignment threshold of the carrier to 80%*/
/*Set the "Extended CDMA channel list message sending identification" to YES (send)*/
/*For carrier 283, set "Whether to send in CCLM" to YES (send), set "Whether to send in
ECCLM" to YES; for carrier 201, set "Whether to send in CCLM" to NO, set "Whether to send in
ECCLM" to NO*/
ECCLMFLG=YES;
MOD CDMACH: CN=10, SCTID=0, CRRID=11, CCLMFLG=NO, ECCLMFLG=NO;
/*Set the "CDMA channel number" in the synchronous channel message of the two carrier to
283*/
(2) The 283 is configured with the paging channel. The 201 is not configured with the paging
channel.
/*Switch on the carrier assignment allowed*/
/*Switch off the service priority assignment, the access priority assignment is set by default*/
/*Set the carrier assignment threshold of the carrier to 80%*/
/*Set "Extended CDMA channel list message sending identification" to YES (send) */
/*Remove all paging channels of the carrier 201*/
RMV PCH: CN=10, SCTID=0, CRRID=11;
/* For carrier 283, set "Whether to send in CCLM" to YES (send), set "Whether to send in
ECCLM" to YES; carrier 201 need not to be configured.*/
ECCLMFLG=YES;
/* Set the "CDMA channel number" in the synchronous channel message of the two carriers to
283*/
The commands mentioned here may change with the version. The commands are only for
reference.
The multiple-carrier assignment is a part of the multiple-carrier network strategy. The
multiple-carrier assignment, idle state residence strategy, and service 2. Typehandoff strategy
achieve the multi-carrier networking. For the details of the typical configuration of the
multiple-carrier networking, refer to the White Paper for CDMA2000 1X Multi-Carrier
Networking.
5.4 Paging Message Dispatching Strategy Optimizing
5.4.1 PCHRSNDSWT (Paging Channel Messages Resending Switch
1. Description
This parameter determines that whether the paging messages are resent by the BTS. If the switch
is off, the BTS does not resend any paging message. If the switch is on, the BTS resent the paging
messages based on the configuration.

2. Type
This parameter is a BTS level internal algorithm parameter.
3. Command Name
Modify: SET CBTSCDMA1XCTRLPARA;
Query: DSP CBTSCFG

4. Range and unit
ON/OFF
OFF
Some paging messages need not the answering of the mobile stations. Whether these messages
are received and processed by the mobile stations is not clearly. By using the paging message
resending function, paging messages that need not the answering of the mobile stations and are
very important in the process can be resent multiple times. Thus, you can ensure that the mobile
stations have received the messages. Most messages need not to be resent. But for the important
messages, such as ECAM, the resending time should be increased.

7. Remark
None
5.4.2 PCHLTSWT (Paging Channel Lifetime Switch
1. Description
The paging channel lifetime parameters are used to control the saving time that the paging
message saves in the paging message queue of the BTS. This switch determines whether the
algorithm is enabled.
2. Type
This parameter is the BTS level parameter.
3. Command Name
Modify: SET CBTSCDMA1XCTRLPARA;
Query: DSP CBTSCFG：CFGID=CBTSCDMA1XCTRLPARA

4. Range and unit
ON (ON)
OFF (OFF)
OFF
None
7. Remark
None
5.4.3 RESENDTIMES (Paging Channel Message Resending Times)
1. Description
This parameter is the number of times that the paging message sent by the BTS. For different
messages, the numbers of the default resending times are different. For the settings in the BSC
side, refer to the contents about the air interface signaling layer 2 sending system.
2. Type
This parameter is a BTS level internal parameter.
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD FCSCHMSGPARA
Query: LST FCSCHMSGPARA

4. Range and unit
0~15
Both the BSC and BTS can determine the resending of the paging channel messages. The paging
channel messages are resent in the BSC by default. The number of times that the paging channel
messages are resent by the BTS is 0 by default.
Generally, keep the default settings. In the case of Abis satellite transport, to save the Abis
bandwidth, the paging channel messages are changed to be sent by the BTS. For details of the
number of resending times, refer to the settings of the number of resending times of the BSC.
When setting the number of resending times, you should consider about the affect caused by the
use of the paging channel.
The paging messages that require the answering of the mobile stations need not to be set the
resending. The recommended number of the resending times is 0. For the important messages that
do not require the answering of the mobile stations, such as the CAM and ECAM, the number of
resending times can be increased. The affect caused by the use of the paging channel should be
considered.
7. Remark
Both the BSC and BTS can determine the resending of the paging channel messages. MOD
FCSCHMSGPARA is used to change the number of the paging channel messages resending
times by the BTS. MOD LACCTRL is used to change the number of the paging channel
messages resending times by the BSC.
For timeslot messages, the dispatching cycle time in the BTS is at least a timeslot cycle time. If a
specified timeslot is not sent out in the first timeslot cycle time, the timeslot can be sent only in
the corresponding timeslot in the next timeslot cycle time. For non-timeslot messages, the
dispatching cycle time in the BTS is at least a timeslot. If the message is not sent out in a timeslot,
the nearest dispatching time is the next timeslot. The lifetime is the limitation of the living
duration of the messages in the queue.
The paging channel messages and their mapping identifications are listed below:
Table 5-1 Paging channel messages
Paging channel messages ID
Channel Assignment Message 0
Extended Channel Assignment Message 1
General Page Message 2
Data Burst Message 3
Authentication Challenge Message 4
Feature Notification Message 5
Service Redirection Message 6
Release Order 7
Order Message 8
5.4.4 MSGLIVETIME (Paging Channel Messages Lifetime)
1. Description
The parameter is the lifetime of the paging messages in message queue of the BTS channel board.
The unit is 80 ms.

2. Type
This parameter is a BTS level parameter.
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD FCSCHMSGPARA: MSGID=MSG0, MSGLIVETIME=128
Query: LST FCSCHMSGPARA

4. Range and unit
0–128, in the unit of 80 ms
0
The setting of the lifetime is related to the setting of the sending interval of the air interface
signaling layer 2 in the BSC side. The lifetime is less than or equal to the sending interval. The
Recommended Value of each paging channel message is different from that of others as shown in
the table 5-2. Adjust the value according to the experience.
Table 5-2 Recommended Value for each type of paging channel messages
PCH message type Lifetime Description
Currently, it is 128 x 80 = 10.24 s;

the sending interval of the CAM
Channel Assignment Message 128 message layer 2 is 300 ms. Change
the living duration to 240 ms (The
living duration is set as 3.)
Currently, it is 128 x 80 = 10.24 s;

the sending interval of the ECAM
Extended Channel Assignment
128 message layer 2 is 300 ms. Change
Message
the living duration to 240 ms (The
living duration is set as 3.)
Currently, it is 64 x 80 = 5120 ms.
Adjust the living duration
General Page Message 64
according to the resending interval
of the MSC.
Data Burst Message 32 32 * 80 = 2560ms
Authentication Challenge
32 32 * 80 = 2560ms
Message
Feature Notification Message 32 32 * 80 = 2560ms
Service Redirection Message 32 32 * 80 = 2560ms
32 * 80 = 2560ms
Currently, the sending interval of

the Order Message layer 2 is 300
Order Message 32
ms. Change the living duration to
240 ms (The living duration is set as
3.)
Currently, the sending interval of the Order Message layer 2 is 300 ms. Change the living
duration to 240 ms (The living duration is set as 3.)

7. Remark
The lifetime of the paging channel messages indicates that the duration from the time that a
message enters into a queue to the time that the message is removed from the queue. The value of
the lifetime should be adjusted according to the network experience. When adjusting the value,
also consider about the cooperation with the timers that are involved in the calling process. For
the GPM, the MSC controls the resending and the resending interval. The lifetime of the GPM is
related to the paging resending interval timer T3113 of the MSC. The lifetime of the GPM should
be less than the T3113. The lifetime of the CAM/ECAM is related to the waiting TCH Preamble
timer CCM_T_WT_TCH_PREAMBLE (The default value is 3.) The lifetime of the
CAM/ECAM should not exceed the timer.
5.5 Extended boundary Page
5.5.1 Paging Optimizing Switch
1. Description
This parameter determines that whether to enable the paging optimizing function. Enabling the
extended boundary Page in the MSC indicates enabling the MSC–cooperate-with-BSC extended
boundary Page mode. If the extended paging virtual LAC is required, the MSC extended paging
mode should be used in the BSC.

2. Type
This parameter is an MSC level parameter.
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD PAGINGSTRA
Query: LST PAGINGSTRA

4. Range and unit
"NO" indicates that the paging optimizing function is disabled. "YES" indicates that the paging
optimizing function is enabled.

YES
None
7. Remark
None
5.5.2 Table of Cells in the Neighboring Location
1. Description
This table configures the neighboring LAC (CI) of the central LAC (CI). The neighboring LAC
(CI) can either belong to the same BSC of the MSC or not.
2. Type
This parameter is an MSC parameter.
3. Command Name
Modify: ADD NEIGHBORLAC
MOD NEIGHBORLAC
RMV NEIGHBORLAC
Query: LST NEIGHBORLAC

4. Range and unit
LAC 0x0001~0xFFFE
None
Six LAC neighboring location areas or ten CI neighboring location areas can be configured.
7. Remark
All neighboring LACs and source LACs must belong to the same MSCID.
When the MSC delivers the paging request messages, first queries the neighboring location area
cell information list and measures whether the LAC includes the extended LACs (or neighboring
LAC). If the LAC does not include the extended LACs (or neighboring LAC), deliver the paging
request message according to the original LAC. If the LAC includes the extended LACs (or
neighboring LAC), take the mapping LAC and deliver it to the BSC during the last paging.
Through the neighboring cell, the MSC achieves the multiple LAC/CI paging function. The MSC
can take multiple LACs or CIs to a BSC in the same time. Currently, the maximum number of the
LACs that are taken is six. The maximum number of the CI that are taken is 10. The LAC cannot
be taken together with the CI.
5.5.3 Location Area Cell Table
1. Description
When an extended LAC is a real LAC, the information of the LAC and the cells that are included
in the LAC should be added to the location area cell table. The information can be used for the
LAC and CI paging.
When an extended LAC is a virtual LAC (that is, when the LAI is configured and the CI is not
configured in the mapping location area cell table), only add the virtual LAC to the location area
cell table.
2. Type
This parameter is an MSC parameter.
3. Command Name
Modify: ADD LAICGI
MOD LAICGI
RMV LAICGI
Query: LST LAICGI

4. Range and unit
None
None
The extended LAC and original LAC area must not overlap. Otherwise, for those overlap cells,
the number of paging times could be very high.

7. Remark
When the LAI is configured, a LAC can include one or more BSCs. In the current table, a LAC
can be configured with five BSCs at most.
When the CGI is configured, the BSC DPC (BSC destination signaling point) maps the BSC that
the cell belongs to.
5.5.4 EXTBNDPAGEMODE (Extended Boundary Page Mode)
1. Description
The extended boundary Page mode need to be configured
2. Type
It is a BSC internal algorithm parameter.
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD EBPGPARA: EXTBNDPAGEMODE = NOEXTPAGE;
Query: LST EBPGPARA

4. Range and unit
NOEXTPAGE – NO EXTENDED BOUNDARYPAGING
REALPAGE – BASE ON REAL LAC
NBRPAGE – BASE ON IDLE NEIGHBORHOOD
INTERBSC – BASE ON MSC

The default value is NOEXTPAGE.
If extending is required, use the INTERBSC (MSC extending).

None
7. Remark
When the extended boundary Page is enabled in the MSC by default and is disabled in the BSC by
default, the BSC processes according to the mode of the MSC. If the MSC sends the virtual LAC
to the BSC, the BSC does not send paging in the virtual LAC. The BSC sends paging only to the
LAC of which the extended LAC is a real LAC. The MSC achieves the function of sending
multiple real LACs. If you want the BSC to send the paging to the LAC of which the extended
LAC is a virtual LAC, you should choose the MSC extending as the extended mode of the BSC.
The extending based on real LACs mode and the extending based on idle handoff relations mode
are used only when the extended boundary Page is achieved in the BSC.
5.5.5 STARTTIME (Start Extended Boundary Page at the N Time)
1. Description
This parameter defines the extended boundary Page strategy after the paging has failed for
several times. When the extended boundary Page mode is the extended boundary Page based on
the real LAC mode or the extended boundary Page based on the idle handoff relation mode, this
parameter must be configured.

2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD EBPGPARA: EXTBNDPAGEMODE=REALPAGE, STRATTIME=3;
Query: LST EBPGPARA

4. Range and unit
1 - Start Extend boundary Page at the first time
2 - Start Extend boundary Page at the second time
3 - Start Extend boundary Page at the third time
1
This parameter is effective for only the internal extend boundary page solution of the BSC.
7. Remark
None
5.5.6 Neighboring LAC Relation Table
1. Description
Add the neighboring LAC for some central LAC in the neighboring LAC relation table. The table
is used for only the internal extended boundary Page based on real LACs solution of the BSC.
The table gives the extending relation between the real LACs.
2. Type
This configuration is the BSC internal configuration.
3. Command Name
Modify: ADD NBRLAC
MOD NBRLAC
RMV NBRLAC
Query: LST NBRLAC

4. Range and unit
None
None
A central LAC cannot have the repeated neighboring LAC. A central LAC can have six
neighboring LACs at most. Considering about the paging traffic, a central LAC is not
recommended to have more than two neighboring LACs.

7. Remark
Using MOD NBRLAC can partly remove the neighboring LAC. The setting method is to fill "-"
in the corresponding parameter location.
5.5.7 IFBORDCELL (If Border Cell)
1. Description
This parameter indicates that whether the cell is a border cell. When choosing the extended
boundary Page based on the idle handoff relation mode, use this parameter to find the border cell.
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: ADD CELL: IFBORDCELL=YES;
MOD CELL: IFBORDCELL=YES;
Query: LST CELL

4. Range and unit
YES (YES)
NO (NO)
NO
None
7. Remark
When the network structure changes due to the new cells adding, the border cell may change.
Some parameters should be changed accordingly.
5.5.8 VIRLAC1~ VIRLAC5 (Extended LAC1~ Extended LAC5)
1. Description
The parameter is used in the extended boundary Page mode that the MSC and the BSC cooperate.
When the MSC is configured with the extended virtual LAC, the cell range of the extended
virtual LAC should be defined in the BSC. Making the cell belongs to the setting extended virtual
LAC by adding the parameter in the cell property.

2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: ADD CELL: BTSID=1, CN=111, LAC="0x1111", VIRLAC1="0x1234";
RMV CELL
Query: LST CELL

4. Range and unit
0x0001~0xFFFE
None
Currently, in a BSC, a LAC can support five LACs at most. The configuration of the extended
LAC should comply with that of the MSC.

7. Remark
None
5.6 GPM Combination
5.6.1 GPMCMBNUM (GPM Combination Numbers)
1. Description
General page message combination number
2. Type
This parameter is a BTS level parameter.
3. Command Name
Query: DSP CBTSCFG

Note that different types of the BTS use different commands. Only the change and Query
commands of the BTS3606 are offered. For the Command Name of other types of the BTS, refer
to the maintenance console help file.
4. Range and unit
0~15
0
Set the number of the GPM consolidation messages to 2 or 3.
7. Remark
When the parameter is set to 0, it indicates that the GPM messages are not consolidated.
5.6.2 GPMSRCHNUM (GPM Search Number)
1. Description
The parameter indicates the number of messages that are searched in the queue when the GPM
messages that can be consolidated are found in the saved paging message buffer queue.
2. Type
This parameter is a BTS level internal parameter.
3. Command Name
Query: DSP CBTSCFG

4. Range and unit
1~100
20
If the number of GPM messages that are searched is set too high, the GPM message process time
is prolonged and the channel board CPU usage is increased. If the number of GPM messages that
are searched is set too low, some GPM messages cannot be consolidated.
7. Remark
When the channel board performs the message scheduling, if the GPM is found, the channel
board will check whether other GPM messages that can be consolidated exist in the buffer. If the
GPM messages that can be consolidated exist, the consolidation is performed.
5.7 Power Adjustment for Inband Signaling Frames
This algorithm has no switch. The algorithm is enabled or disabled by the forward signaling
frame gain adjustment offset.
When the forward signaling frame gain adjustment offset is non-zero value, the algorithm is
enabled.
When the forward signaling frame gain adjustment offset is 0, the algorithm is disabled.
5.7.1 FWDSIGGAIN (forward signaling frame gain adjustment offset)
1. Description
This parameter adjusts the offset of the TX gain for the forward signaling frames.
2. Type
BTS internal parameter.
3. Command Name
Query: DSP CBTSCFG:;
Note: The command varies with different BTS types. These are the commands in the BTS 3606.
For the commands of other BTS types, see the Help file of the LMT.
4. Range and Unit
–31 to +31 (unit: 0.25dB)
0
6. Setting Tradeoff
High values increase the reliability of the transmission of the inband signaling frames at the cost
of more power and reduced capacity. The value shall preferably be between 4–12.
7. Remarks
None
5.8 L2 Acknowledgement over r-csch by the BTS
5.8.1 L2ACKCTRLSWT (switch that specifies whether the BTS sends L2 ACK
over the r-csch)
1. Description
This parameter determines whether the BTS sends the L2 ACK message to the access messages
(access messages and paging messages) over the r-csch.

2. Type
3. Command Name
SET CBTSSIGSOFTPARA
DSP CBTSCFG: BTSID=1, CFGID=CBTSSIGSOFTPARA;

4. Range and Unit
1 (ON), 0 (OFF).
1
6. Setting Tradeoff
None
7. Remarks
This switch shall work with bit 5 of software parameter 54 of the RRM.
5.8.3 L2ACKLT (life cycle of the L2 ACK message)
1. Description
This parameter specifies the life cycle of the L2 ACK messages to be sent by the BTS over the
r-csch. When the BTS schedules the messages according to the priorities, it is likely that the L2
ACK messages are buffered by the BTS and are not timely delivered to the MS. When it is time to
deliver the L2 ACK message to the MS, the MS status has shifted and the ACK message is no
longer needed. The message needs not occupy the BTS resource anymore. Therefore, this
parameter specifies the life cycle of the L2 ACK messages. When an L2 ACK message expires
the life cycle before it is sent, the BTS automatically deletes the message and does not deliver the
message to the MS.

2. Type
3. Command Name
Query: DSP CBTSCFG: BTSID=1, CFGID=CBTSSIGSOFTPARA;

4. Range and Unit
1–255 (unit: 80ms).
16
6. Setting Tradeoff
If the value is large, the BTS resource is wasted; if the value is small, the BTS easily deletes the
L2 ACK that should be sent. Preferably the life cycle is 16, which is 1.28s.
7. Remarks
It is recommended not to change this parameter.
5.8.4 L2ACKRSNDNUM (L2 ACK message resend times)
1. Description
This parameter specifies the times that the BTS resends the L2 ACK message. If the number of
resends is n, the BTS unconditionally sends the L2 ACK message for n+1 times.
2. Type
3. Command Name
Query: DSP CBTSCFG: BTSID=1, CFGID=CBTSSIGSOFTPARA;

4. Range and Unit
0–15
2
6. Setting Tradeoff
None
7. Remarks
None
5.9 Air Interface Signaling L2 Sending Mechanism
The system specifies the modes, resend times, and resend interval for the signaling messages. The
modes of some signaling messages are fixed by the system and the modes of other signaling
messages can be changed by the user. The detailed default setting is listed in the following table.
Assure mode, resend times, and resend interval of the signaling messages
Name of the Assure Mode Resend Times Resend Interval

Message over (ms)
F-CSCH
Authentication Assured, not Send time is 1, 5000 (Since there is

Challenge subject to change. not subject to no resend, the interval
Message(AUCRM) change by the here refers to the
DB. interval that the LAC
waits for ACK from
the MS.)
Bs Ack Unassured, not 3 300

Order(BSACK) subject to change.
Channel Assignment Unassured, not 10 300

Message(CAM) subject to change.
Data Burst Assured, not Send time is 1, 5000

Message(DBM) subject to change. not subject to
change by the
DB.
Extended Channel Unassured, not 10 300

Assignment subject to change.
Message(ECAM)
Feature Notification Assured, not Send time is 1, 5000

Message(FNM) subject to change. not subject to
change by the
DB.
Order Unassured, subject 3 300

Message(ORDM) to change.
Service Redirection Unassured, subject 3 300

Message(SRDM) to change.
Name of the Assure Mode Resend Resend Signaling
Message over Times Interval Priority
F-DSCH (ms)
Alert With Information Unassured, subject 5 50 High
Message(AWIM) to change.
Assured Bs Ack Assured, not 3 300 High
Order(ABSACK) subject to change.
Authentication Unassured, subject 3 100 Low
Challenge to change.
Message(AUCM)
Unassured Bs Ack Unassured, not 3 100 Low
Order(UNBSACK) subject to change.
Candidate Frequency Unassured, subject 3 100 Low
Search Control to change.
Message(CFSCNM)
Candidate Frequency Unassured, subject 3 100 Low
Search Request to change.
Message(CFSRQM)
Data Burst Assured, not 2 300 Low
Message(DBM) subject to change
by the DB.
Extended Flash With Assured, not 2 300 Low
Information subject to change
Message(EFWIM) by the DB.
Extended Handoff Assured, subject to 3 300 High
Direction change.
Message(EHDM)
Extended Neighbor Unassured, subject 3 100 Low
List Update to change.
Message(ENLUM)
Extended Unassured 3 60 High
Supplemental
Channel Assignment
Message(ESCAM)
Flash With Assured, not 2 300 Low
Information subject to change.
Message(FWIM)
General Handoff Assured, subject to 3 300 High
Direction change.
Message(GHDM)
In-Traffic System Unassured, subject 3 100 Low
Parameters to change.
Message(ITSPM)
Neighbor List Update Unassured, subject 3 100 Low
Message( NLUM) to change.
Order Unassured, subject 3 100 Low
Message(ORDRM) to change.
Power Control Unassured, subject 3 100 Low

Message(PCNM) to change.
Power Control Unassured, subject 3 100 Low
Parameters to change.
Message(PCNPM)
Send Burst DTMF Unassured, subject 2 100 Low
Message(BDTMFM) to change.
Service Connect Unassured, subject 5 50 High
Message(SCM) to change.
Service Option Assured, not 3 300 High
Control subject to change
Message(SOCM) by the DB.
Service Request Unassured, subject 5 50 High
Message(SRQM) to change.
Service Response Unassured, subject 5 50 High
Message to change.
(SRPM)
SSD Update Unassured, subject 3 100 Low
Message(SSDUM) to change.
Status Request Unassured, subject 3 100 Low
Message(STRQM) to change.
Universal Handoff Assured, subject to 3 300 High
Direction change.
Message(UHDM)
For the precautions you should pay attention to when changing the parameters, see the functional
description of the Principle volume.
5.9.1 ASSMODE (air interface L2 ARQ service mode)
1. Description
This parameter specifies the ARQ service mode for the LAC layer of the forward air interface
signaling. You can configure different service modes for different forward air interface signaling.
The service modes that the ARQ layer provides for the upper layer are assured transmission mode
and unassured transmission mode.
Under the assured mode, the logical channel sends a message and waits for the ACK from the
LAC layer of the receiver. If in a certain time interval the logical channel fails to receive the ACK,
it resends the message in a fixed interval until it receives the ACK.

Under the unassured mode, the logical channel sends a message and does not wait for the ACK
from the LAC layer of the receiver. Under this mode, the sender is not sure whether the message
is correctly received. Therefore, usually the sender resends the message quickly and continuously
for several times to ensure correct reception.
There are some restraints on the resend times, resend interval, and the timer. See the CDMA
Performance Feature Volume.

2. Type
3. Command Name
Query: MOD LACCTRL
Query: LST LACCTRL:;

4. Range and Unit
YES (assured), NO (unassured).
The system specifies the modes for the signaling messages. It is recommended to use the system
preset values. It is recommended not to change the values.

6. Setting Tradeoff
The more the resend times, the more reliable the signaling transmission at the cost of the system
load and, for the inband signaling, at the cost of voice quality.
7. Remarks
None
5.9.2 TRANSTIMES (resend times of the air interface signaling messages at L2

under unassured mode)
1. Description
This parameter configures the resend times for the signaling messages at the LAC layer.
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD LACCTRL:;

4. Range and Unit
1–20
Different signaling messages have different default values.
6. Setting Tradeoff
See the preceding two tables.
7. Remarks
None
5.9.3 TRANSINTERVAL (resend interval of the air interface signaling

messages at L2 under unassured mode)
1. Description
This parameter configures the resend interval for the signaling messages at the LAC layer.
2. Type
3. Command Name

4. Range and Unit
50 to 8000 (unit: ms)
6. Setting Tradeoff
See the preceding two tables.
7. Remarks
None
5.9.4 SIGPRIO (signaling priority)
1. Description
The signaling priority determines how the MAC layer encapsulates the signaling at the dedicated
channel. If the signaling received by the MAC layer is of high priority, the signaling occupies the
whole 20 ms service frame.

2. Type
3. Command Name

4. Range and Unit
LOW(low priority), HIGH(high priority)
6. Setting Tradeoff
High priority ensures timeliness of the signaling transfer but affects the service frames.
7. Remarks
None
Configuration Examples
The preceding parameters shall use the default values except that the switches shall be tailored to
the actual network configuration. The following example is for demonstration only. For detailed
data configuration, consult the technicians at the HQ.
Example 1: This example modifies the signaling deliver mode to alleviate the voice quality
problem caused by frequent handoff during the call and many inband signaling messages. (This
example is for demonstration only. If you encounter similar problems, contact the HQ for a
solution.)
The following commands modify the deliver mode of the following signaling messages:
Extended Neighbor List Update Message, Neighbor List Update Message, unassured ack order,
In-Traffic System Parameters Message, Extended Handoff Direction Message, General Handoff
Direction Message, Universal Handoff Direction Message
MOD LACCTRL: CHANTYPE=DSCH, MSGID1=ENLUM, SIGPRIO=LOW;
MOD LACCTRL: CHANTYPE=DSCH, MSGID1=NLUM, SIGPRIO=LOW;
MOD LACCTRL: CHANTYPE=DSCH, MSGID1=UNBSACK, SIGPRIO=LOW;
MOD LACCTRL: CHANTYPE=DSCH, MSGID1=ITSPM, SIGPRIO=LOW;
MOD LACCTRL: CHANTYPE=DSCH, MSGID1=EHDM, SIGPRIO=LOW;
MOD LACCTRL: CHANTYPE=DSCH, MSGID1=GHDM, SIGPRIO=LOW;

MOD LACCTRL: CHANTYPE=DSCH, MSGID1=UHDM, SIGPRIO=LOW;
The preceding commands are subject to change in different versions and are for reference only.
5.10 Timers in the Access Procedure
5.10.1 Working Time of the Timers
Timers of the CS calling access procedure

Timers of the CS called access procedure
MS BTS BSC MSC
[A1] Paging Request

[Abis] General
Page Message
[Um] General Page
Message
[Um] Page Response CCM timer 43

Message MSC timer T3113
[Abis] Page Response
Message
[Um] BS ACK Order
[A1] Paging Response
CCM timer 0
A1] Assignment Request
Um] Extended Channel
Assignment Message
Um] TCH Preamble CCM timer 4

(non-signaling)
[Um] BS ACK Order
CCM timer 5
[Um] MS ACK Order MSC timer T10
[Um] Service Connect

Message
Um] Service Connect CCM timer 10

Complete Message
[A1] Assignment
Um] Alert with Complete
Information
Um] MS ACK Order
Um] Connect Order MSC timer T30
[Um] BS ACK Order
[A1] Connect
Timers of the PS calling access procedure
Timers of the PS called access procedure
5.10.2 Explanation of the BSC Timers

CCM timer 0 (CCM waiting for assignment request timer)
1. Description
This is the timer for the BSC to wait for the assignment request delivered by the MSC.
2. Type
Standard timer.
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD TMR;
Query: LST TMR

4. Range and Unit
1000–15000 ms
6000 ms
6. Setting Tradeoff
This parameter is not subject to change. A relocation network can inherit the value of the original
network.
7. Remarks
None
CCM timer 4 (CCM waiting for TCH Preamble from the FMR timer)
1. Description
This is the timer for the BSC to wait for capture of the MS reverse preamble.
2. Type
This is a BSC internal timer.
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD TMR;
Query: LST TMR

4. Range and Unit
1000–15000 ms
3000 ms
6. Setting Tradeoff
Increasing the timer value improves the access success rate at the radio side, prolongs the access
time, and decreases the access success rate of the core network due to timeout of the MSC. This
parameter is not subject to change. A relocation network can inherit the value of the original
network.
The timer value can be increased (for example, to 6s) for microwave transmission network.
7. Remarks
None
CCM timer 5 (CCM waiting for ACK from MS timer)
1. Description
This is the timer for the BSC to wait for ACK from the MS.
2. Type
Standard timer.
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD TMR;
Query: LST TMR

4. Range and Unit
1000–15000 ms
2000 ms
6. Setting Tradeoff
network.
7. Remarks
In case of MS-initiated negotiation for the data service, the timer value shall be less than 3000 ms.
Otherwise, the data service cannot be called. This is because when an MS is called, it does not
initiate negotiation. The negotiation is initiated by the BSC after timeout of the timer to set up the
traffic channel.
CCM timer 10 (CCM waiting for service connection complete message timer)
1. Description
This is the timer for the BSC to wait for the service connection complete message.
2. Type
Standard timer.
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD TMR;
Query: LST TMR

4. Range and Unit
1000–15000 ms
2000 ms
6. Setting Tradeoff
network.
7. Remarks
None
CCM timer 43 (CCM waiting for paging response message timer)
1. Description
This is the timer for the BSC to wait for the paging response message.
2. Type
Standard timer.
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD TMR;
Query: LST TMR

4. Range and Unit
1000–15000 ms
6000 ms
6. Setting Tradeoff
This timer is set according to the MSC paging resend timer and is usually MSC paging resend
interval plus 1. For example, if the interval between two resent messages is 5 s, then the BSC sets
the value of this timer to 6 s.

7. Remarks
None
CCM timer 49 (CCM waiting for A9-Connect-A8 message timer)
1. Description
This is the timer for the BSC to wait for A9-Connect-A8 message from the PCF.
2. Type
Standard timer.
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD TMR;
Query: LST TMR

4. Range and Unit
1000–30000 ms
5000 ms
6. Setting Tradeoff
None
7. Remarks
None
CCM timer 51 (CCM waiting for A9-Update-A8 response timer)
1. Description
This is the timer for the BSC to wait for A9-Update-A8 response message from the PCF.
2. Type
Standard timer.
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD TMR;
Query: LST TMR

4. Range and Unit
1000–15000 ms
2000 ms
6. Setting Tradeoff
This timer is set according to the MSC paging resend timer and is usually MSC paging resend
interval plus 1. For example, if the interval between two resent messages is 5 s, then the BSC sets
the value of this timer to 6 s.

7. Remarks
None
CCM timer 55 (CCM waiting for BS SRV RSP message timer)
1. Description
This is the timer for the BSC to wait for the BS service response message from the MSC.
2. Type
This is a BSC internal timer.
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD TMR;
Query: LST TMR

4. Range and Unit
1000–15000 ms
4000 ms
6. Setting Tradeoff
None
7. Remarks
None
PCU timer 0 (A11-Register-Request timeout resend timer)
1. Description
This is the timer for resending A11-Register-Request when the PCF waiting for
A11-Register-Reply from the PDSN times out.

2. Type
Standard timer.
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD TMR;
Query: LST TMR

4. Range and Unit
1000–5000 ms
1000 ms
6. Setting Tradeoff
None
7. Remarks
None
PCU timer 1 (billing-information-containing A11-Register-Request timeout resend timer)
1. Description
This is the timer for resending A11-Register-Request that contains the billing information when
the PCF waiting for A11-Register-Reply from the PDSN times out.
2. Type
Standard timer.
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD TMR;
Query: LST TMR

4. Range and Unit
1000–5000 ms
1000 ms
6. Setting Tradeoff
None
7. Remarks
None
PCU timer 5 (waiting for A9-BS-Service-Response timer)
1. Description
This is the timer for the PCF to wait for the A9-BS-Service-Response message from the BSC.
2. Type
Standard timer.
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD TMR;
Query: LST TMR

4. Range and Unit
1000–5000 ms
5000 ms
6. Setting Tradeoff
None
7. Remarks
None
PCU timer 14 (call activation waiting for A9-Setup-A8 timer)
1. Description
This is the timer for the PCF to wait for the call activation A9-Setup-A8 message from the BSC.
2. Type
This is a PCF internal timer.
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD TMR;
Query: LST TMR

4. Range and Unit
2000–20000 ms
10000 ms
6. Setting Tradeoff
The timer includes the procedure of the air interface paging the terminal and shall be greater than
or equal to the sum of the first paging and the resent pagings.
7. Remarks
None
PCU timer 15 (call activation waiting for A9-Update-A8 timer)
1. Description
This is the timer for the PCF to wait for the call activation A9-Update-A8 message from the BSC.
2. Type
This is a PCF internal timer.
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD TMR;
Query: LST TMR

4. Range and Unit
2000–20000ms
10000ms
6. Setting Tradeoff
This timer includes the interaction between the forward and reverse traffic channels after the air
interface channel is assigned and shall be greater than or equal to the sum of all the air interface
timers.
7. Remarks
None
Chapter 6 1X Call Drop Mechanism
6.1 Reverse Call Drop Timer Parameters
6.1.1 PTHDL (default path delay from DPUS to BTS)
1. Description
This parameter is the estimated time it takes from DPUSb sending a forward service frame to the
BTS channel board receiving this frame. The DPUSb board uses this estimated value to calculate
the sending time of the DPUSb board.

2. Type
Subrack-level internal parameter.

3. Command Name
Modify: MOD SDU1XFPMDC
Query: LST SDUINF

4. Range and Unit
5–30 ms
10 ms
6. Setting Tradeoff
7. Remarks
None
6.1.2 RVWIN (size of the BTS receiving window)
1. Description
This parameter specifies the time range that the BTS channel board allows a DPUSb forward
service frame to arrive. The DPUSb board uses this range to decide whether to adjust the sending
time of the DPUSb.

2. Type
3. Command Name
Query: LST SDUINF

4. Range and Unit
2–20ms
4ms
6. Setting Tradeoff
7. Remarks
None
6.1.3 RFRCVTMRLEN (reverse frame reception timer length)
1. Description
The DPUSb board uses this value to start the reverse frame reception timer. The timer decides the
time interval of detecting the reverse link.

2. Type

3. Command Name
Query: LST SDUINF

4. Range and Unit
20–65535 ms
6000 ms
6. Setting Tradeoff
It is not recommended to modify this parameter value. When the Abis is a microwave or
satellite link, the value of this parameter shall be increased.

7. Remarks
None
6.1.4 RFCMBTMRLEN (reverse frame combination timer length)
1. Description
The DPUSb board uses this value to start the reverse frame combination timer. The timer
determines the maximum difference between the arrival times of the reverse service frames of the
branches.
2. Type

3. Command Name
Query: LST SDUINF

4. Range and Unit
5–80 ms
18 ms
6. Setting Tradeoff
None
7. Remarks
When a good branch and a bad branch are combined, if the transmission delay of the good branch
is large and the received frame numbers of the good branch are the frame numbers of the last
20ms, the good frames are discarded and the frames received by the bad branch within the current
20ms are processed. This causes the problem that the good branch does not work and the call drop
with the cause value "Too Many Erasure Frames".
6.1.5 FCHCHKERASFRMRAT (checks the ratio of FCH ERASURE frames of the voice
service)
1. Description
This parameter specifies the percentage of the FCH ERASURE frames of the reverse frames of
the voice service specified by the DPUSb board.

2. Type

3. Command Name
Query: LST SDUINF

4. Range and Unit
Value range: 1%–99%
Recommended range: 90%–95%

90%
6. Setting Tradeoff
A large value of the parameter lowers the call drop rate of the voice service but deteriorates the
call quality (or even monolog); a small value increases the call drop rate of the voice service. A
relocation network shall inherit the call drop timer of the original network and calculate the
corresponding value of this parameter.

7. Remarks
None
6.1.6 FCHCHKERASFRMTHD (checks the threshold of FCH ERASURE frames of the voice
service)
1. Description
This parameter is the threshold of the FCH ERASURE frames of the voice service specified by
the DPUSb board.

2. Type

3. Command Name
Query: LST SDUINF

4. Range and Unit
100 frames to 1000 frames.
300 frames.
6. Setting Tradeoff
A large value of the parameter lowers the call drop rate of the voice service but deteriorates the
call quality (or even monolog); a small value increases the call drop rate of the voice service. A

7. Remarks
None
6.1.7 FCHCHKIDLEFRMTHD (checks the threshold of the FCH IDLE frames)
1. Description
This parameter is the threshold of the FCH IDLE frames specified by the DPUSb board. If the
DPUSb board continuously receives the reverse IDLE frames more than the threshold, the
DPUSb board requests the CCM to release the call.

2. Type

3. Command Name
Query: LST SDUINF

4. Range and Unit
300 frames.
6. Setting Tradeoff
A large value of the parameter lowers the call drop rate but deteriorates the call quality (or even
monolog); a small value increases the call drop rate.

7. Remarks
None
6.1.8 FCHWAITIDLEFRMTMRLEN (length of the timer waiting for FCH IDLE frames)
1. Description
Before setting up an FCH, the DPUSb board shall interact with the BTS through the IDLE frame.
If within the timer length, the DPUSb board fails to receive the IDLE frame from the BTS, setting
up the FCH fails.

2. Type

3. Command Name
Query: LST SDUINF

4. Range and Unit
20–65535 ms
1200 ms
6. Setting Tradeoff
A small value of the parameter leads to failure to set up the FCH and lowers the access success
rate and soft handoff success rate. A large value prolongs the access delay and soft handoff delay.
7. Remarks
None
6.1.9 SCHWAITIDLEFRMTMRLEN (length of the timer waiting for SCH IDLE frames)
1. Description
Before setting up an SCH, the DPUSb board shall interact with the BTS through the IDLE frame.
If within the timer length, the DPUSb board fails to receive the IDLE frame from the BTS, setting
up the SCH fails.

2. Type

3. Command Name
Query: LST SDUINF

4. Range and Unit
20–65535 ms
270 ms
6. Setting Tradeoff
A small value of the parameter leads to failure to set up the SCH and lowers the SCH setup
success rate; a large value prolongs the SCH setup time.

7. Remarks
None
6.1.10 FCHCHKPKTERASFRMRAT (checks the ratio of FCH ERASURE frames of the data
service)
1. Description
This parameter specifies the percentage of the FCH ERASURE frames of the reverse frames of
the data service specified by the DPUSb board.

2. Type

3. Command Name
Query: LST SDUINF

4. Range and Unit
1%–99%
90%
6. Setting Tradeoff
A large value of the parameter lowers the call drop rate of the data service but deteriorates the call
quality (or even monolog); a small value increases the call drop rate of the data service. A

7. Remarks
None
6.1.11 FCHCHKPKTERASFRMTHD (checks the threshold of FCH ERASURE frames of the
data service)
1. Description
This parameter is the threshold of the FCH ERASURE frames of the data service specified by the
DPUSb board.
2. Type

3. Command Name
Query: LST SDUINF

4. Range and Unit
600 frames.
6. Setting Tradeoff
A large value of the parameter lowers the call drop rate of the data service but deteriorates the call
quality (or even monolog); a small value increases the call drop rate of the data service. A

7. Remarks
None
Chapter 7 Handoff Parameters
7.1 Handoff Search Parameters
7.1.1 SRCHWINA (Search Window Size for the Active Set and Candidate Set)
1. Description
It defines the search window size used when the MS searches for pilots in the active set and
candidate set.
The MS mainly searches the earliest detected usable multipaths for pilots. It is related to
multi-paths of pilots but is not related to the relative propagation delay between pilots.
2. Type
It is an Um interface parameter, sent in the SPM/ESPM/ITSPM and EHDM/GHDM/UHDM.
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD HO;
Query: V3R1/V3R6 - LST HOINF: QRYINF=HO;

4. Range and Units
chip4～chip452 (For details, see Table 7-1.)
Table 7-1 Search window size
Chip20（20chips）
It is recommended that the operation range of this parameter is 5~9, that is 20~80chips.
All pilot siganls must be within the search window of the active set according to local propagation
delay. If the value of this parameter is too small, some signals in the active set may excluded from
the search window. These signals may become interference, which affects link quality. If the
value of this parameter is too great, some non-related signals may also be within the search
window, which affects link quality too.
A search window with a bigger size slows down the speed in which the MS searches for neighbor
pilots. In this case, the handoff cannot be initiated in time and system performance decreases.
7. Remarks
Search windows (such as SRCHWINA, SRCHWINN, and SRCHWINR) and handoff threshods
(such as TADD, TDROP, TCMP, and TTDROP) are sector carrier level parameters, so it is
possible to configure different value for each sector carrier.
During the soft handoff, if a pilot is added to the active set, and the parameter configuration of this
pilot is different from that of the soft handoff parameter used by the current call, the BSC does not
update the MS handoff parameters immediately. The BSC always selects a pilot in the active set
as the main branch and uses the parameters of this branch.
The rules for maintaining the main branch are as follows:
During a call setup, the strongest in the initial active set is selected as the main branch, which can
be used to perform handoff decision. If this main branch has not been deleted, the MS and BSC
use the parameters of this branch all the time. If this branch has been deleted, the strongest pilot
belongs to local BSC in the remaining active set is selected as the main branch. The In-Traffic
System Parameter Message (ITSPM) notifies the soft handoff parameters of the new main branch
to the MS.
7.1.2 SRCHWINN (Search Window Size for the Neighbor Set)
1. Description
It defines the search window size used when the MS searches pilots in the neighbor set.
The MS searches the pilots, with the time of the earliest arriving usable multi-paths as its time
reference and the PN offset of the neighbor pilots as its search center. Therefore, this parameter is
related to both the multi-paths of the neighbor pilots and the relative propagation delay from
neighbor pilots to reference pilots.

2. Type
It is an Um interface parameter, sent in the SPM/ESPM/ITSPM and GHDM/UHDM.
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD HO;

4. Range and Units
chip60
This parameter is set according to the multi-paths of the neighbor pilots and the propagation delay
from neighbor pilots to reference pilots. The setting of the parameter must guarantee that all
neighbor pilot signals are within the search window in the neighbor set. Note that the search
window takes the time of the earliest arriving multipahts as its reference time and the PN offset of
neighbor pilot as its search center.
If the value of this parameter is too small, neighbor pilot signals may fall outside the search
window. In this case, the neighbor pilot is missing. Therefore, this neighbor pilot cannot be added
to the active set and normal soft handoff cannot be initiated. Thus call drop occurs.
If the value of this parameter is too great, the time of the MS searching each pilot increases. In this
case, the speed of the MS searching neighbor pilots slows down, which may delay the soft
handoff and affect the handoff performance.

7. Remarks
Figure 7-1 shows how an MS searches pilots. The MS searches the pilots in the active set, with
the earliest arriving usable multi-paths as its search center; the MS searches the pilots in the
neighbor set, with the reference pilots as its time reference and the PN offset of the neighbor set as
its search center. Therefore, the search window size for the neighbor set is larger than that for the
active set.
Figure 7-1 MS search center
7.1.3 SRCHWINR (Search Window Size for the Remaining Set)
1. Description
It defines the search window size used when the MS searches the pilots in the remaining set.
The MS searches the pilots in the remaining set, with the time of the earliest arriving usable
mutlipaths as its time reference, and the PN offset of the pilots in the remaining set as its search
center, which is the same as the case of MS searching the pilots in neighbor set.
2. Type
It is an Um interface parameter, sent in the SPM/ESPM/ITSPM and GHDM/UHDM.
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD HO;

4. Range and Units
chip80
If the value of this parameter is too small, the usable pilots in the remaining set may be missing. In
this case, the missing neighbor detection of the BSC cannot be fully used.
If the value of this parameter is too great, the MS may search out other non-related signals. In
addition, the time of the MS searching the pilots in remaining set may increase, which slows
down the MS search speed.

7. Remarks
If network optimization has been finished and neighbor relation has been perfectly configured,
the MS need not search the remaining set. In this case, the value of this parameter can be set to 0
to increase the MS search speed.
If the missing neighbor detection is used to detect if a missing neighbor is present in the system,
however, this parameter needs to be set.
When the MS searches the pilots in remaining set, the value of the PN offset in the remaining set
is integer multiple that of the parameter PLTINC. Therefore, during PN configuration, all PN
offset values in the system is integer multiple that of the parameter PLTINC.
7.1.4 PNINC (PN Increment)
1. Description
It indicates the increment of PN sequence offset index.
The value of this parameter is the greatest common divisor of pilot PN sequence offsets of
neighbor BTSs. If the PLTINC is specified, the number of available pilot PN in the system is
512/PLTINC.
The smaller the value of this parameter, the more available pilot PN offsets are. Consequently,
multiplexing distance between pilots with the same phase increase, the interference between them
decrease, but the phase spacing between different pilots is decreased and the pilots may be
confused.
If the value of this parameter is too great, the available pilot PN offsets are reduced and pilots in
the remaining set are reduced, too. The MS spends less time in scanning the pilots.
In actual conditions, the strong pilot signals may be lost hardly, but available pilot PN offsets
decrease, the multiplexing distance between pilots with the same phase is reduced, and the
interference between them increases.
In addition, this parameter determines the maximum size of SRCHWINN and SRCHWINR.
2. Type
It is an Um interface parameter, sent in the NLM/ENLM/GNLM.
3. Command Name
Modify: ADD BSCINF:
Query: LST BSCINF

4. Range and Units
1–15, in the unit of 64PN chips
Recommended: 2，4，6，8
4
It ranges from 2 to 6.
In the dense urban areas, the value of this parameter can be small.
In the wide coverage areas, the value of this parameter can be great.
7. Remarks
It is recommended the operation range of this parameter is {2, 4, 6, 8}.
7.1.5 SCHWNDADJSWT (Automatic Searching Window Adjustment Switch)
1. Description
This parameter indicates whether the BTS enables the automatic search window function.
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: SET CBTSCDMA1XCHIPPARA
Query: DSP CBTSCFG

4. Range and Units
ON/OFF
ON
None
7. Remarks
None
7.1.6 FNGRMX95 (Maximum Number of IS-95 Channel Searcher)
1. Description
This parameter indicates the maximum number of searchers used by IS-95 channels.
2. Type
3. Command Name
Query: DSP CBTSCFG

4. Range and Units
4~6
6
None
7. Remarks
If the value of this parameter is set too great, the number of channels that use the minimum
number of fingers will increase. If the value of this parameter is set too small, each channel is
assigned with only a maximum of four fingers. As a result, when more than four fingers need to
be assigned, the assignment fails. The advantages of multipath energy combining are not realized.
The CSM5000 restricts the number of fingers for each IS-95 channel to six.
7.1.7 FNGRMX2K (Maximum Number of IS2000 Channel Searcher)
1. Description
This parameter indicates the maximum number of searchers used by IS-2000 channels.
2. Type
3. Command Name
Query: DSP CBTSCFG

4. Range and Units
4~8
8
None
7. Remarks
If the value of this parameter is set too great, the probability that a channel uses the minimum
number of fingers will rise. The minimum number of fingers is defined by CHANNEL_
FINGER_ MIN. If the value of this parameter is set too small, each channel is assigned with only
a maximum of four fingers. As a result, when more than four fingers need to be assigned, the
assignment fails. The advantages of multipath energy combining are not realized. The CSM5000
restricts the number of fingers for each IS-2000 channel to 128.
7.1.8 MAXUSRSPD (Maximum User Speed)
1. Description
This parameter indicates the maximum user speed. It is used to set the Doppler bins of IS-2000
searchers.
2. Type
3. Command Name
Query: DSP CBTSCFG: BTSID=0, CFGID=CBTSCDMA1XSECTORPARA;

4. Range and Units
0~65535
255
None
7. Remarks
This parameter is used to compensate the Doppler shift. If the baseband frequency shift is within
+/-240Hz, you can use 0 Hz bin. If the baseband frequency shift is within +/-720 Hz, you can use
0 Hz bin and +/-480 Hz Doppler bins. This mode occupies no extra searcher capacity. But
compared with the 0 Hz Doppler bin, the possibility of false alarms rises. If the baseband
frequency shift is up to +/-1200 Hz, use 0 Hz bin and +/-960 Hz Doppler bins. Table 7-2 lists the
mapping relations between Doppler bins and parameter values.
Table 7-2 Mapping relations between parameter values and Doppler bins
Value Number of PCGs to integrate
0 0 Hz bin only
1 0 Hz and +/- 480 Hz
2 0 Hz and +/- 960 Hz
7.1.9 TCHSCHWSZ (TCH Search Window Size)
1. Description
The parameter indicates the search window size of TCHs. The BTS maintains a search window
for each TCH, and only captures and demodulates signals that enters the search window.
2. Type
3. Command Name

Query: DSP CBTSCFG: BTSID=0, CFGID=CBTSCDMA1XSECTORPARA;
4. Range and Units
1~16(units:64PN)
1
If the size of the search window is large, more signals could be captured, but the search time drags.
If the size of the search window is small, the search speed is fast, but less signals would be
captured.
7. Remarks
None
7.2 Pilot Set Judgment Parameters
7.2.1 MAXSHO (Maximum Number of SHO Branches)
1. Description
It defines the maximum number of target active set branches during soft handoff. According to
the protocol, MS can support six branches in the active set at most. When BSC performs the soft
handoff judgment, it will limit the target active set branches according to this parameter.
2. Type
BSC internal parameter
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD BSCHO
Query: LST BSCHO

4. Range and Units
2-6
3
If the value of this parameter is too great, it will increase soft handoff ratio, occupy more forward
link resource and waste forward capacity.

If the value of this parameter is too small, it will decrease soft handoff ratio. But soft handoff gain
cannot be utilized, so it will influence the quality of service.
If the Erlang traffic is small and the resource is rich, this parameter can be set as 4 to improve the
quality of service and decrease the call drop ratio.

7. Remarks
None
7.2.2 TADD (Pilot Good & Available Threshold)
1. Description
It defines when the MS moves the pilots in neighbor set to candidate set and sends a pilot strength
measurement message (PSMM) to the BSC. Pilot can be incorporated into active set when its
strength reaches this threshold. Both the MS and BSC must use this parameter.
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD HO;
Query: V3R1/V3R6- LST HOINF: QRYINF=HO;

4. Range and Units
-63~0, in the unit of 0.5 dB
Recommended: -24～-28
-28
It is recommended that the operation range of this parameter is -24~ -28.

If the value of this parameter is too great (for example, it is larger than -24), the soft handoff
threshold will be too high, which dwindles soft handoff area and reduces soft handoff ratio. In this
case, seamless coverage may not be realized. Because soft handoff gain cannot be fully used, call
drop may occur.
If the value of this parameter is too small (for example, it is smaller than -28), the soft handoff
threshold will decrease, which enlarges soft handoff area and increases soft handoff ratio. In this
case, much forward channel resource is cost, thus forward capacity is reduced.
7. Remarks
Soft handoff ratio can be controlled flexibly through adjusting TADD, but call drop ratio and call
quality of the system should be considered after the adjustment.

When a call has several soft handoff branches, and each branch has a different TADD value, the
present BSC uses the main branch of this call as soft handoff parameter. For the rules for
maintaining the main branch, see the Remarks on SRCHWINA.
Figure 7-2 shows a typical soft handoff process and the role the soft handoff thresholds (such as
TADD, TDROP, and TTDROP) play during soft handoff.
Figure 7-2 A typical soft handoff process
The procedures are as follows:
1) When the pilot strength of the neighbor set exceeds TADD, the MS sends a PSMM and moves
this pilot to candidate set.
2) The BSC sends an HDM.
3) The MS moves this pilot to active set and sends a HCM.
4) When the pilot strength is lower than TDROP, the MS starts the handoff removal timer.
5) If the handoff removal timer expires, the MS sends a PSMM.
6) The BSC sends an HDM.
7) The MS moves this pilot to neighbor set and sends an HCM.
7.2.3 TDROP (Pilot Min. Threshold)
1. Description
If the pilot strength of an active set or a candidate set is higher than the value of this parameter, the
MS starts the handoff removal timer for this pilot. For more information, see the description of
TTDROP.
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD HO;

4. Range and Units
-63–0, in the unit of 0.5 dB
-32
If the value of this parameter is too great (for example, it is greater than -28), the soft handoff
threshold will be too high. In this case, an available signal will be deleted from the active set
immediately. When this available pilot is not in the active set, it becomes interference, which may
cause call drop.
If the value of this parameter is too small (for example, it is smaller than -32), the soft handoff
threshold will decrease. In this case, a pilot in the active set cannot be easily deleted from this
active set, which increases soft handoff ratio and wastes forward capacity.
7. Remarks
TADD and TDROP can be used to add and delete a branch respectively. The two parameters are
set mainly for hysteresis purpose. So, when adjusting TADD and TDROP, be sure that T_ADD
(dB) >T_DROP (dB) is satisfied.
7.2.4 TTDROP (Pilot Removal Timer Length)
1. Description
If the pilot strength of an active set or a candidate set is lower than TDROP, the MS starts a
handoff removal timer for this pilot. If the pilot strength is higher than TDROP after the timer is
started, the MS performs reset and closes the handoff removal timer.
For the pilot in candidate set, when the handoff removal timer expires, the MS moves this pilot to
neighbor set automatically; for the pilot in active set, when the handoff removal timer expires, the
MS sends a PSMM to remind the BSC to delete this pilot.

2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD HO;

4. Range and Units
S0.1～S319
Table 7-3 lists the mapping between TTDROP and timer expiration.
T_TDROP Timer Expiration (Sec) T_TDROP Timer Expiration (Sec)

S0.1 0.1 S27 27
S1 1 S39 39
S2 2 S55 55
S4 4 S79 79
S6 6 S112 112
S9 9 S159 159
S13 13 S225 225
S19 19 S319 319
S4（4秒）
If the value of this parameter is too great, the poor pilot in the active set can be present in the
active set for a longer time, which increases soft handoff ratio and wastes the resources on
forward traffic channels.
If the value of this parameter is too small, when the pilot strength of the active set fluctuates, the
pilots can be easily deleted even if its strength deteriorates in a short time. In this case, TTDROP
cannot perform hysteresis function, which may cause frequent handoff.

7. Remarks
According to the protocols, TTDROP is designed mainly for hysteresis purpose.
7.2.5 TCMP (Pilot Compare Threshold)
1. Description
If the pilot strength of the candidate set is TCMP/2 higher than that of the active set, the MS sends
a PSMM to remind the BSC to perform the handoff.
For details, see Figure 7-3.

2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD HO;

4. Range and Units
0~15, in the unit of 0.5 dB
Recommended: 4～6
5
If the value of this parameter is too great, the pilot in the candidate set can easily replace the pilot
in the active set, so the handoff occurs frequently.
If the value of this parameter is too small, the pilot in the candidate set can hardly replace the pilot
in the active set, so the pilot in the candidate set is always present as interference, which reduces
forward capacity.
7. Remarks
When the number of the branches in the active set reaches to the maximum, TCMP determines
whether the branch replacement should be performed.
Figure 7-3 TCMP triggers a PSMM
7.2.6 NBRMAXAGE (Neighbor Set Maximum AGE)
1. Description
It defines the maximum age of the pilots in neighbor set.
The MS has a counter for each pilot in neighbor set. Each time when the MS receives a neighbor
list update message (NLUM), the value of the counter for the original pilot in neighbor set is
increased by 1.
　 If the value of the counter exceeds the value of this parameter, this pilot will be deleted from the
neighbor set. Therefore, if the value of this parameter is set to 0, each time when the MS receives
a NLUM, the MS deletes all pilots in the original neighbor set. Thus the MS can always use the
contents of the newest NLUM.
　 If the value of this parameter is 2, the pilot moving back from the active set or the candidate set
to neighbor set (this pilot is not present in two continuous NLUMs) is deleted from neighbor set.
2. Type
It is an Um interface parameter, sent in the SPM/ESPM/ITSPM.
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD HO;

4. Range and Units
0~15
Recommended:0～3
0
If the value of this parameter is too great, the pilots moving back from the active set or candidate
set can be present in the neighbor set for a longer time. In this case, the new neighbor pilots in the
NLUM may be exclusive from the neighbor set of the MS (when the number of neighbor pilots
exceeds the maximum number in the MS neighbor set).
If the value of this parameter is 0, each time when the MS receives a NLUM, the MS uses the
neighbor pilot lists in the NLUM as the new neighbor set.
When the network has just been finished, because the neighbor relation configuration is not done,
the value of this parameter can be set to 1. In this case, the MS is allowed to inherit the used pilots
in neighbor set for some time.
If the number of neighbor cells is large, the value of this parameter is recommended to be 0 so that
the MS can use the contents of the neighbor pilots in the newest NLUM delivered by the BSC.
7. Remarks
None
7.3 Dynamic Soft Handoff
7.3.1 SOFTSLOPE (Soft Handoff Increasing Slope Ratio)
1. Description
It defines the slope ratio when the MS performs dynamic threshold soft handoff.
When the dynamic soft handoff is enabled, this parameter is used to add and delete a branch. This
parameter is used by the MS. Only MSs above IS95B supports dynamic threshold soft handoff.
This parameter is a dynamic soft handoff parameter defined in the protocols and used by the MS.
This parameter is different from the dynamic soft handoff switch of BSS side.
2. Type
It is an Um interface parameter, sent in the ESPM/ITSPM and GHDM/UHDM.
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD HO;

4. Range and Units
0~63, in the unit of 1/8
The recommended value is 0, namely, the dynamic threshold soft handoff is disabled. When it is
enabled, the recommended value is 18, indicating 2.25.

If the value of this parameter is 0, the dynamic threshold soft handoff of the MS is disabled;
otherwise it is enabled.
If the dynamic soft handoff switch of the BSS side and the dynamic soft handoff (it is defined by
the protocols) used by the MS are enabled at the same time, abnormal cases may occur and call
drop ratio may increase. Therefore, the two kinds of dynamic soft handoffs cannot be realized at
the same time.
The smaller the value of this parameter, the higher the dynamic adding threshold and the dynamic
removing threshold are when the pilot strength of the active set is fixed. In this case, to add the
pilot to the active set is hard, but to delete the pilot from the active set is easy. Thus soft handoff
ratio decreases. However, the soft handoff gain cannot be fully used and the call drop ratio
increases.
The greater the value of this parameter, the lower the dynamic adding threshold and the dynamic
removing threshold are when the pilot strength of the active set is fixed. In this case, the soft
handoff ratio increases and excessive forward power is consumed. Thus the valid forward
capacity is reduced.
7. Remarks
The dynamic soft handoff is introduced in the protocols for the following purpose:
The forward link capacity is increased through soft handoff ratio control. The higher the pilot
strength of the active set, the higher the dynamic threshold is. In this case, to add a new branch to
the active set is hard, which controls the soft handoff ratio.
Figure 7-4 Typical dynamic soft handoff procedure
The procedures are as follows:
1) When the pilot strength of P2 in the neighbor set exceeds TADD, the MS moves it to the
candidate set.
2) When the pilot strength of P2 is greater than
, the MS sends a PSMM.
3) The BSC sends an HDM, the MS moves this pilot to active set and sends a HCM.
4) When the pilot strength of P2 is less
than , the MS starts the handoff
removal timer.
5) If the handoff removal timer expires, the MS sends a PSMM.
6) The BSC sends an HDM, the MS moves this pilot to the candidate set and sends a HCM.
7) When the pilot strength is lower than TDROP, the MS starts the handoff removal timer.
8) If the handoff removal timer expires, the MS moves this pilot to neighbor set.
7.3.2 ADDINTERC (Soft Handoff Pilot Adding Intercept)
1. Description
It defines the adding intercept when the MS performs dynamic threshold soft handoff. The BSC
sets this parameter for the MS in binary supplementary code.
It is a dynamic soft handoff parameter defined in the protocol and used by the MS. It is different
from the dynamic soft handoff switch of BSS side.

2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD HO;

4. Range and Units
6, that is, 3dB
If the dynamic soft handoff switch of BSS side and the dynamic soft handoff (it is defined by the
protocol) used by the MS are enabled at the same time, abnormal cases may occur and call drop
ratio may increase. Therefore, the two kinds of dynamic soft handoffs cannot be enabled at the
same time.
The smaller the value of this parameter, the lower the dynamic adding threshold is, and the easier
to add neighbor pilot to the active set. In this case, however, the forward capacity is reduced.
The greater the value of this parameter, the higher the dynamic adding threshold is, and the harder
to to add neighbor pilot to the active set. In this case, soft handoff ratio decreases, but the soft
handoff ratio cannot be fully used, and the call drop ratio increases.
7. Remarks
Figure 7-5 Triggering conditions for the MS to send a PSMM when dynamic threshold is used.
When dynamic threshold soft handoff is used, the MS reports a PSMM to BSC according to the
dynamic threshold in the following cases:
　 If any candidate meets the following inequality, and no PSMM is reported since the latest
handoff, the MS originates a PSMM and reports it to BSC.
includes all the pilots in the active set, which is different from removal
threshold.
　 If the signal strength of any pilot in the neighbor set or remaining set meets the following
inequality, the MS originates a PSMM, reports it to BSC, and moves it to the candidate set.
　 If the pilot strength of any candidate set is 0.5 times that of an active set, the pilot strength of any
candidate set meet the following inequality, and no PSMM is reported to BSC since the latest
handoff, the MS originates a PSMM and reports it to BSC.
7.3.3 DROPINTERC (Soft Handoff Pilot Removing Intercept)
1. Description
It defines the removing intercept when the MS performs dynamic threshold soft handoff. The
BSC sets this parameter for the MS in binary supplementary code.
It is a dynamic soft handoff parameter defined in the protocol and used by the MS. It is different
from the dynamic soft handoff switch of BSS side.

2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD HO;

4. Range and Units
6, that is, 3 dB
If the dynamic soft handoff switch of BSS side and the dynamic soft handoff (it is defined by the
protocol) used by the MS are enabled at the same time, abnormal cases may occur and call drop
ratio may increase. Therefore, the two kinds of dynamic soft handoffs cannot be enabled at the
same time.
The smaller the value of this parameter, the lower the dynamic removing threshold is. In this case,
deleting the pilots in the active set is harder and soft handoff occurs more frequent, which reduce
the forward capacity.

The greater the value of this parameter, the higher the dynamic removing threshold is. In this case,
deleting the pilots in the active set is easier and soft handoff ratio decreases. However, the soft
handoff gain cannot be fully used, which increases call drop ratio.
7. Remarks
In the R03 and later, the offset is not used. When dynamic threshold handoff is used, the MS
calculates dynamic removing threshold according to this parameter, and the dynamic removal
threshold helps the MS determine whether to start the handoff removal timer for the pilots in
active set. When this timer expires, the MS originates a PSMM and reports it to BSC.
The MS calculates the dynamic removal thresholds as follows:
　 Suppose the active set has Na pilots, which are arranged in ascending sequence according to
pilot strength. For example: PS1 < PS2 < PS3 <…< PSna.
　 If PSi meets the following inequality, the MS starts the handoff removal timer.
7.4 Hard Handoff Macro Diversity
7.4.1 INTRABSCHHOSW (Intra-BSC HHO Macro Diversity Switch)
1. Description
It controls whether to use the macro diversity hard handoff of intra-BSC.
2. Type
It is a BSC internal parameter.
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD BSCHO:
Query: LST BSCHO:

4. Range and Units
ON (ON)
OFF (OFF)
ON
The hard handoff macro diversity enables the MSs to perform hard handoff to multiple target
carriers and helps use the soft handoff gain in time and improve the hard handoff successful ratio.
If there are too many hard handoff target carriers, too many resources are occupied for a short
time.
7. Remarks
When many signaling points exist in a BSC, the intra-signaling point hard handoff is not related
to the MSC. Therefore, hard handoff macro diversity requires no support of the MSC, and
Huawei supports intra-signaling point hard handoff in terms of the flow. In the same BSC, the
flows of inter-signaling point hard handoff are the same as that of inter-BSC hard handoff. At that
time, the hard handoff macro diversity requires the support of the MSC. If intra-BSC hard
handoff must use the hard handoff macro diversity, the hard handoff bands need to be arranged
under one signaling point to simplify the flow.
7.4.2 INTERBSCHHOSW (Inter-BSC HHO Macro Diversity Switch)
1. Description
It controls whether to use the macro diversity hard handoff of inter-BSC.
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD BSCHO:
Query: LST BSCHO:

4. Range and Units
ON (ON)
OFF (OFF)
ON
The hard handoff macro diversity enables the MSs to perform hard handoff to multiple target
carriers and helps use the soft handoff gain in time and improve the hard handoff successful ratio.
If there are too many hard handoff target carriers, too many resources are occupied for a short
time.
7. Remarks
None
7.4.3 HHOMAXTARGNUM (Max Number of HHO Branches)
1. Description
It indicates the maximum number of branches in the hard handoff target active set allowed by the
macro diversity hard handoff. The active set of MS supports a maximum of six branches.
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD BSCHO:
Query: LST BSCHO:

4. Range and Units
1~6
6
If only the hard handoff algorithms measurable by the pilot of hard handoff target pilot are used
(such as same-frequency hard handoff algorithm, Mobile assisted hard handoff algorithm, and
pilot beacon hard handoff algorithm) and the strength of target pilot is known, so the hard handoff
target is accurate, the value of this parameter is set to 3. This case is the same as the maximum
number of branches in soft handoff target active set.
If the hard handoff algorithms not measurable by the strength of hard handoff target pilot are used
(such as HANDDOWN hard handoff algorithm and direct hard handoff algorithm), but the hard
handoff target is inaccurate, set the parameter to a larger value to increase the hard handoff
successful ratio.
7. Remarks
None
7.5 Direct Hard Handoff
7.5.1 DHHOSW (Direct HHO Switch)
1. Description
It indicates whether the call on a carrier can perform direct hard handoff.
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD PHOALG:
Query: V3R1/V3R6 - LST HOINF: QRYINF=PHOALG;

4. Range and Units
ON (ON)
OFF (OFF)
OFF
It is configured according to actual conditions. If the source cell and the target cell have no
common frequency, the handdown hard handoff cannot be used. For the IS95 MS, if the direct
hard handoff algorithm used, with the support of hard handoff macro diversity, the hard handoff
successful ratio can also be guaranteed.

7. Remarks
The system uses the direct hard handoff only when a call meets the following conditions:
　 All pilots in the active set of the call are allowed to perform the direct hard handoff.
　 This call cannot perform mobile assisted hard handoff.
　 The service type of this call supports hard handoff (such as SMS and Markov call do not support
hard handoff in the protocols).
Notice: For 1X calls, if the MAHHO is switched on, and there are inter-frequency neighbor pilots
exist, MAHHO is preferred. HANDDOWN and Direct HHO are forbidden.
Besides, before switch on Direct HHO, Direct HHO target carrier should be added.
7. 5.2 ABSTHRS (Direct HHO EC/IO Strength Absolute Threshold )
1. Description
When the pilot strength of the soft handoff target active set is lower than this threshold, and the
minimum RTD of the current active set is higher than T_HHO_DIRECT_RTD, the direct hard
handoff is triggered.
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD DRCT:
Query: V3R1/V3R6 - LST HOINF: QRYINF=DRCT;

4. Range and Units
-16
The smaller the value of this parameter (for example, smaller than -28), the lower the actual
corresponding physical threshold is. Thus the later the direct hard handoff is triggered, but the
signals of source channel links will fade dramatically, so the MS cannot receive the HDM sent on
the source channel and the hard handoff fails.
The greater the value of this parameter (for example, larger than -10), the higher the actual
physical threshold is. Thus the direct hard handoff is triggered earlier, which is helpful for the MS
to receive the HDM sent on the source channel, but the coverage area of the source cell is small.
7. Remarks
The triggering conditions of the direct hard handoff are described as follows:
Set the pilot strength of the soft handoff target active set to ShoTargEcIo; set the minimum RTD
of the current active set to AsMinRtd. When BSC receives a PSMM or PPSMM, the direct hard
handoff is triggered if the following conditions are met:
ShoTargEcIo ≤ T_HHO_DIRECT_ABS_THRESH and
AsMinRtd ≥ T_HHO_DIRECT_RTD
7. 5.3 MAXRTD (Direct HHO Max. Loop Delay Threshold)
1. Description
When the pilot strength of the soft handoff target active set is lower than
T_HHO_DIRECT_ABS_THRESH, and the minimum RTD of the current active set is higher
than the direct HHO max. loop delay threshold, the direct hard handoff are is triggered. For the
meaning of the RTD, see the MAXRTD (Handdown HHO Max. Loop Delay Threshold).
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD DRCT:
Query: V3R1/V3R6 - LST HOINF: QRYINF=DRCT;

4. Range and Units
0~65535, in the unit of chip
15
The greater the value of this parameter, the larger the distance between the hard handoff band and
the source cell is. Thus the later the hard handoff is triggered.
The smaller the value of this parameter, the smaller the distance between the hard handoff band
and the source cell is. Thus the earlier the hard handoff is triggered.
7. Remarks
At present, for the methods calculating RTD, see MAXRTD (Handdown HHO Max. Loop Delay
Threshold).
When a call has hard handoff relationship, see Remark of TADDHHOBPLT (Pilot Beacon
HHO Serving Carrier Threshold).

Example 1
Instance: Carrier A and carrier B, whose cell ID-sector ID-frequency are (300-2-283) and
(301-3-160), configure carrier A to carrier B Direct HHO
/*Switch on the Direct HHO*
MOD PHOALG: DRCT=ON;
/*Configure Direct HHO parameters, Direct HHO target carrier of carrier A is carrier B*/
MOD DRCTTRG: SRCCDMACH="300-2-283", BNDCLS=BC800, ARFCN=10,
TRGCDMACH1="301-3-160";
7.6 Mobile Assisted Hard Handoff
7.6.1 MAHHOSW (MAHHO Switch)
1. Description
It indicates whether to use Mobile assisted hard handoff for the MSs of above IS95B in the case of
different-frequency hard handoff.
According to the protocols, only the MSs of above IS95B support different frequency search in
the traffic channel.

2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: V2R2/V2R3/V3R1 - MOD BSCHO
V3R6C01 - MOD PHOALG
Query: V2R2/V2R3/V3R1 - LST BSCHO:;
V3R6C01 - LST HOINF

4. Range and Units
ON (ON)
OFF (OFF)
OFF
The MSs of above IS95B use the Mobile assisted hard handoff algorithm, instead of new
hardware, to perform different frequency hard handoff.
The MSs measure signal strength of pilots automatically. At that time, the hard handoff target is
accurate, and the successful ratio is high. When measuring the different frequency strengths, the
MSs disconnect the communication with serving channel number, and the call quality decreases.
This method is recommended when the MSs of IS95B perform different frequency hard handoff.
[Rmarks]
The system can use Mobile assisted hard handoff only when a call meets the following
conditions:
　 The MAHHOSW is ON.
　 The protocol revision of this call is above IS95B.
　 Different frequency neighbor relation exists in this call.
hard handoff in the protocols)

7.6.2 TADDMAHHO (MAHHO Serving Carrier Threshold)
1. Description
When the strength of the soft handoff target active set is lower than the value of this parameter,
and the strength of the mobile assisted hard handoff target active set is higher than
T_MAHHO_ABSOLUTE_THRESH, the mobile assisted hard handoff is triggered.

2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD HHOMA:
Query: V3R1/V3R6 - LST HOINF: QRYINF=HHOMA;

4. Range and Units
-20
The smaller the value of this parameter is (for example, smaller than -32), the poorer the signal
strength of the source cell side is when the MS performs hard handoff from the source cell to the
target cell, and the later the hard handoff is triggered. In this case, it is hard for the MS to receive
the HDM delivered by the BTS at the source cell side, so the hard handoff may fail.
If the value of this parameter is too great (for example, larger than -14), the triggering conditions
of hard handoff can be easily met. In this case, the hard handoff is triggered depending on HHO
absolute threshold.
7. Remarks
The triggering conditions of mobile assisted hard handoff are as follows:
Set the strength of the soft handoff target active set to ShoTargEcIo; set the strength of the mobile
assisted hard handoff target active set to HhoTargEcIo. When BSC receives a PSMM, PPSMM,
or PSMM, it calculates the strength of the soft handoff target active set and the strength of the
mobile assisted hard handoff active set respectively. If the results meet one of the following
conditions, the mobile assisted hard handoff is triggered.
z 　 ShoTargEcIo ≤ TADDHHOSF and
HhoTargEcIo ≥ THHOSFABSTHRS
z 　 HhoTargEcIo-ShoTargEcIo ≥ THHOSFRELTHRS
7.6.3 RELTHRS (MAHHO Relative Threshold)
1. Description
When the pilot strength of the mobile assisted hard handoff target active set is higher than that of
the soft handoff target active set, the mobile assisted hard handoff is triggered.
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD HHOMA:

4. Range and Units
0~63, in the unit of 0.5 dB, that is, 0–31.5 dB
5
The greater the value of this parameter, the stronger the signals in the target cell for hard handoff
is higher than that in the source cell, so the easier for the MS to capture a forward channel in the
target cell. However, because the signals in the source cell are poor during hard handoff, the MS
cannot receive the HDM of the source cell.
The smaller the value of this parameter, the easier for the hard handoff to be triggered. In this case,
the signals on the forward channels of the source cell side do not deteriorate dramatically, which
is good for the MS to receive the HDM of the original cell, but the MS may not capture a forward
channel of the source cell.

7. Remarks
For the triggering conditions of the mobile assisted hard handoff, see the 7. Remark of
TADDHHOSF (Same-Frequency HHO Serving Carrier Threshold).
When a call has hard handoff relationship, the system will order the MS to report the PSMM
periodically so that it can monitor the pilot strength of the active set of the source cell. In this case,
the hard handoff can be triggered in time.
7.6.4 STRTSRCHTHRS (MAHHO Start Search Threshold)
1. Description
When mobile assisted hard handoff is used, BSC sends the CFSRQM to the MS to start candidate
frequency search. This parameter determines the time for BSC to send the CFSRQM to the MS.
When the pilot strength is lower than this threshold, BSC sends the CFSRQM to the MS to start
candidate frequency search.

2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD HHOMA:

4. Range and Units
-16
corresponding physical threshold is. Thus the later the hard handoff search is triggered. Because
the link quality of the original cell is rather poor now, the MS cannot necessarily receive the
CFSQM. In this case, the frequency search cannot be started normally and the time for triggering
hard handoff is delayed.
The greater the value of this parameter (for example, smaller than -16), the earlier for the
inter-frequency search to be started is when the pilot strength of candidate frequency is good.
Because inter-frequency may break the conversation, the link quality of serving frequency may
be affected.
7. Remarks
periodically so that it can monitor the pilot strength of the active set of the original cell. If the
inter-frequency search is not started until the pilot strength of active set is lower than the
inter-frequency search threshold, the BSC sends a CFSQM to the MS to prepare for hard handoff.
If the pilot strength of the active set recovers, namely, it is higher than stop inter-frequency search
threshold, the BSC sends a CFSCNM to stop the inter-frequency search so that the influence of
the inter-frequency on the conversation quality can be reduced to the minimum.
In the R03 and later, the offset is not used.

7.6.5 STOPSRCHTHRS (MAHHO Stop Search Threshold)
1. Description
When mobile assisted hard handoff is used, BSC will send a CFSQM to the MS to start candidate
frequency search, but the inter-frequency has a negative effect on conversation quality. Therefore,
when the pilot strength of the active set becomes good, BSC must send a CFSCNM to the MS to
stop the inter-frequency search. As a result, this parameter determines the time for the BSC to
send the CFSCNM to the MS to stop the inter-frequency search. When the pilot strength of the
active set is higher than this threshold, the BSC will send the CFSCNM to stop the
inter-frequency search.
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD HHOMA:

4. Range and Units
-12
corresponding physical threshold. Thus it is easier for the hard handoff search to be stopped,
which reduces the times for the MS to perform inter-frequency search. In this case, however, the
inter-frequency search cannot be triggered in time.
corresponding physical threshold is. Thus it is harder for the hard handoff search to be stopped. In
this case, frequent inter-frequency search may affect conversation quality, but the frequent
inter-frequency search is good for the MS to perform real-time measurement of candidate
frequency.
7. Remarks
See Remark of RELTHRS (MAHHO Relative Threshold).

Example 1
(301-3-160), configure carrier A to carrier B MAHHO
/*Add different frequency handoff relation*
ADD NBRCDMACH: CENFRE="300-2-283", NBRPILOT="301-3-160";
7.7 Parameter List for Searching and Controlling Candidate
Frequencies
7.7.1 SRVFRQECTHRS (Total Receive Power Threshold of Serving

Frequency)
1. Description
This parameter indicates the threshold on the total receive power of the serving frequency. The
BSC delivers the Candidate Frequency Search Request Message to the MS. If the search type is
periodic search, the MS determines whether to start or end the search on inter-frequency carriers
based on the value of this parameter and the SF_TOTAL_EC_IO_THRESH, which indicates
the overall pilot strength threshold of the serving frequency. If this parameter is set to 11111, the
MS does not depend on the total receive power of the serving frequency to determine whether to
start the inter-frequency search. If this parameter is set to a value other than 11111, the MS
measures the spectral density of total receive power of the serving frequency every frame (20 ms).
Then the MS calculates the average value of the ten latest values of the N12m to calculate the
receive power, that is, total_ec of the serving frequency. If the value of total_ec is smaller than
(-120 + 2 x SF_TOTAL_EC_THRESH), the MS searches inter-frequency carriers. Otherwise,
the MS stops such searching.

2. Type
Air interface parameter (CFSRQM)

3. Command Name
Modify: MOD CFSC
Query: V3R1/V3R6 - LST HOINF: QRYINF=CFSC;

4. Range and Units
0–31. The value of this parameter can be converted to and from the actual power. For details, see
the "Setting Tradeoff" part.

31
Setting Tradeoffs
If you do not want the MS to determine whether to start or stop the inter-frequency search based
on the total receive power of the serving frequency, set this parameter to 11111, that is 31. If you
want the MS to start the inter-frequency search when the total receive power of the serving
frequency is smaller than the value of total_ec_thresh, or stop such search when the total receive
power of the serving frequency is greater than the value of total_ec_thresh, set the parameter to
the value calculated by .

7. Remarks
The protocol defines two parameters, namely, SF_TOTAL_EC_THRESH and
SF_TOTAL_EC_IO_THRESH to control the inter-frequency searches of the MS. This
provides a flexible mechanism. When the link quality of the serving frequency is good, the MS
does not search inter-frequency carriers to minimize the impact on voice quality. When the link
quality of the serving frequency is poor, the MS searches inter-frequency carriers timely to
prepare for hard handoffs. If these two parameters are set improperly, however, the MS could not
start inter-frequency searches timely, which in turn leads to delayed hard handoffs. By default,
this parameter is set to 31, indicating that this parameter is not used. You can adjust the value
based on the actual situation, and then observe the effects.
7.7.2 SRVFRQECIOTHRS (Total Ec/Io Threshold of the Serving Frequency)
1. Description
This parameter indicates the total pilot Ec/Io threshold of the serving frequency. The BSC
delivers the Candidate Frequency Search Request Message to the MS. If the search type is
periodic search, the MS determines whether to start or end the inter-frequency search based on
the value of this parameter and SRVFRQECIOTHRS, which indicates the overall receive power
threshold of the serving frequency. If this parameter is set to –31, the MS does not depend on the
total pilot Ec/Io threshold of the serving frequency to determine whether to start the
inter-frequency search. If this parameter is set to a value other than –31, the total pilot Ec/Io value
of the serving frequency equals to the value of total_ec_io. If the value of total_ec_io is smaller
than (SRVFRQECIOTHRS)/2, the MS starts the inter-frequency search. Otherwise, the MS stops
such searches.
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD CFSC

4. Range and Units
-31~0(units:0.5dB)
-31
If you do not want the MS to determine whether to start or stop the inter-frequency search based
on the total pilot Ec/Io of the serving frequency, set this parameter to –31. If you want the MS to
start the inter-frequency search when the total pilot Ec/Io of the serving frequency is smaller than
the value of SRVFRQECIOTHRS, or stops such search when the total pilot Ec/Io of the serving
frequency is greater than the value of SRVFRQECIOTHRS, set this parameter to the value
calculated by .
For example, if this parameter is set to –20, the MS starts the inter-frequency search when the
total pilot Ec/Io of the serving frequency is smaller than –10dB.

7. Remarks
This parameter functions the same as T_MAHHO_START_SRCH_THRESH and
T_MAHHO_STOP_SRCH_THRESH in the HHOMAHHOPARA table of the BSC. But this

parameter is a function of the MS whereas the other two parameters are functions of the BSC.
Their common effects are: When the link quality of the serving frequency is good, the MS does
not search inter-frequency carriers to minimize the impact on voice quality. When the link quality
of the serving frequency is poor, the MS searches inter-frequency carriers timely to prepare for
hard handoffs.
7.7.3 DRXPWRTHRS (Threshold on Receive Power Difference)
1. Description
This parameter indicates the difference between cand_freq_pwr and serving_freq_pwr. The
parameter cand_freq_pwr refers to the receive power of the candidate frequency whereas the
parameter serving_freq_pwr refers to the receive power of the serving frequency. This
difference is expressed with the parameter minimum_power_diff. When the actual power
difference between the candidate frequency and the serving frequency is smaller than this
threshold, the MS stops the searching process. This parameter is also used in the hard handoff of
the MS. If the power difference between the target frequency and the serving frequency is smaller
than the threshold specified by this parameter, the hard handoff fails and the MS switches to the
original channel. When this parameter is set to 0, this parameter is not used.
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD CFSC

4. Range and Units
0–31. The value of this parameter can be converted to and from the actual power. For details, see
the "Setting Tradeoff" part.

0
If you do not want the MS to stop searching candidate frequencies or drop the hard handoff to
candidate frequencies automatically based on the power difference between the candidate
frequency and the serving frequency, set this parameter to 0. If you want the MS to stop searching
candidate frequencies when the power difference between the candidate frequency and the
serving frequency is smaller than the value of minimum_power_diff, set this parameter to the
value calculated by . Note that the unit of
minimum_power_diff is dB.
For example, if you want the MS stops searching candidate frequencies or drop the hard handoff
when the power difference is 4 dB, set this parameter to 17.

7. Remarks
If the parameter is set improperly, the hard handoff may fail. By default, the value of this
parameter is 0, indicating that this parameter is not used.
7.7.4 MINPLTECIO (Minimum Pilot Ec/Io of Candidate Frequency)
1. Description
When the MS receives the HDM, it tries to demodulate the F-TCH of the target frequency. If the
overall pilot strength of the Active Set of the candidate frequency is smaller than the value of this
parameter, the MS regards the search or handoff as failed and stops demodulating the F-TCH. If
the value of this parameter is set to 0, this parameter is not used. That is, the MS performs
searching and hard handoff regardless of the Ec/Io strength of the Active Set of the candidate
frequency.
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD CFSC

4. Range and Units
-31~0(units:0.5dB)
0
If you do not want the MS to stop demodulating the TCH based on the Ec/Io strength of the target
Active Set of the candidate frequency, set the value of this parameter to 0. Otherwise, set the
parameter to a value other than 0. For example, if the value of this parameter is set to –20, the MS
does not demodulate the F-TCH of the target Active Set when the overall pilot strength of the
target Active Set of the candidate frequency is smaller than –10 dB.
7. Remarks
If the value of this parameter is set improperly, the hard handoff may fail. By default, the value of
this parameter is 0, indicating that this parameter is not used.
7.7.5 CFTADD (T_ADD of the Candidate Frequency)
1. Description
This parameter determines whether the MS reports the pilot PN of a candidate frequency when
the MS reports the Candidate Frequency Search Report Message (CFSRPM) to the BSC. For
example, if the value of this parameter is set to –12dB, the MS reports pilots whose strength is
greater than –12dB in the CFSRPM.

2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD CFSC

4. Range and Units
-63~0(units:0.5dB)
-28
The actual reporting threshold decreases with the value of this parameter. If the value of this
parameter is set too small, such as to –32, the MS tends to report more pilots of the candidate
frequency. As a result, the MS tends to report CFSRPMs more frequently. But many CFSRPMs
may have little value. In this way the signaling load of the system increases. If the value of this
parameter is set too great, such as to –16, the MS tends to report less pilots of the candidate
frequency. The reported signaling decreases. But the MS may miss handoff opportunities because
the reporting terms are too strict.

7. Remarks
It is recommended to set this parameter to a relatively small value. Then the MS reports more
candidate pilots to the BSC, and the BSC can flexibly determine handoffs.
7.7.6 TFWAITTM (Wait Time on the Candidate Frequency)
1. Description
During hard handoffs, the MS starts a timer. Before the timer times out, the MS must receive
N11m (one) good frame from the target pilot. Otherwise, the MS regards the handoff as failed.
This parameter is used to set the timeout limit of the timer. The unit is four frames.
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD CFSC

4. Range and Units
0~15(units:4 frames)
4
The time that the MS waits for the target channel when the MS does not capture any target
channel increases when the value of this parameter increases. For example, if the value of this
parameter is set to 15, the MS can wait up to 1.2s. If the MS is not allowed to switch to the
original channel when hard handoff fails, it is recommended to set the value of this parameter as
great as possible. Then the MS could have enough time to capture the target channel.
7. Remarks
For 1x MSs, the protocol supports the function of returning to the original channel at hard handoff
failure. That is, when the MS fails to capture target channel during the inter-frequency hard
handoff, it switches back to the original serving frequency. Then it reports a CFSRPM on the
original channel, whereas the value of LAST_SRCH_MSG is 1. During tests, however, if
RETURN_IF_HANDOFF_FAIL is set to a value that allows the MS to return to the original
channel in GHDM, the MS could not perform intra-frequency measurements even if hard handoff
succeeds. After the hard handoff, the MS reports no PSMMs. As a result, soft handoffs are not
performed normally. Therefore, it is not recommended to allow the MS to return to the original
channel in GHDM.
7.7.7 CFPLTINC (PN Increased Step on the Candidate Frequency)
1. Description
This parameter indicates the pilot PN_INC on the candidate frequency. When the MS
successfully switches to the candidate frequency, this parameter is used directly as PILOT_INC
of the target frequency to search for the Remaining Set.

2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD CFSC

4. Range and Units
2~6(units:64 chips)
4
You can set the value of this parameter based on the PN planning of the candidate frequency and
the actual situation.

7. Remarks
After hard handoffs, the BSC delivers a Neighbor List Message (NLUM) to the MS. The NLUM
contains the PILOT_INC field. If CF_PILOT_INC is not correctly set, the MS updates the
PILOT_INC when it receives the NLUM. Therefore, the incorrect configuration has little impact
on the searching of the Remaining Set by the MS after the hard handoff.
7.7.8 CFSRCHWINN (Neighbor Set Search Window of Candidate Frequency)
1. Description
This parameter indicates the default search window to search the Neighbor Set of candidate
frequencies. The Candidate Frequency Search Request Message (CFSRQM) can designate
different search windows for neighbor pilots of each candidate frequency. If no search window is
designated for pilots of a candidate frequency, the MS uses this parameter by default, to search
the Neighbor Set pilots of the candidate frequency.

2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD CFSC

4. Range and Units
Reference the table of ”SRCHWINA”.

Chips60(60chips)
The possibility that neighbor pilots signals of the candidate frequency are detected by the search
window increases when the value of this parameter increases. Therefore, if this parameter is set to
a great value, more neighbor pilots could be captured. But the search time drags, and some
irrelevant signals are detected. If this parameter is set to a small value, neighbor pilots signals of
the candidate frequency are hard to detect because greater delay exists between the candidate
frequency and the serving frequency.

7. Remarks
You can set this parameter to a slightly great value based on the actual situation.
7.7.9 CFSRCHWINR (Remaining Set Search Window of Candidate

Frequency)
1. Description
This parameter indicates the search window for the Remaining Set of candidate frequencies.
After the successful hard handoff to the candidate frequency, the MS uses this parameter as
SRCH_WIN_R to search for the Remaining Set.

2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD CFSC

4. Range and Units
Reference the table of ”SRCHWINA”.

Chips80(80chips)
See SRCH_WIN_R.
7. Remarks
For the candidate frequency, the protocol defines that the MS contains the following pilot sets:
Neighbor Set and Search Set. The Neighbor Set is used to save the pilot list of the candidate
frequency, and the Search Set is the subset of the Neighbor Set and used to search pilots. But the
protocol does not clearly state that the MS contains a Remaining Set of the candidate frequency.
The reason is that CF_SRCH_WIN_R is used to set the initial value of SRCH_WIN_R after the
MS is successfully switched to the candidate frequency. Generally, after hard handoffs, the BSC
delivers an In-Traffic System Parameter Message (ITSPM) to the MS to update the search
window of the MS. Therefore, the value of this parameter has little impact on the system.
7.7.10 SRCHPRD（Periodic Search Period)
1. Description
When the BSC instructs the MS to periodically search candidate frequencies, the MS starts a
timer. This parameter is used to set the duration of the timer.

2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD CFSC

4. Range and Units
0–15.
the table 7-4 lists the mapping relations between the parameter value and the search period.
Table 7-4 Mapping relations between parameter values and search period
2(2second)
The reporting period on candidate frequency search reports extends when the value of this
parameter increases. As a result, the BSC could not obtain the pilot strength of candidate
frequencies easily, and trigger hard handoffs timely. If the value of this parameter is set too small,
the search reports on candidate frequencies are reported frequently. Although the BSC could
trigger hard handoffs timely, the system is burdened with too much signaling and frequent
inter-frequency searches. As a result, the voice quality is greatly impacted.

7. Remarks
None
7.7.11 CFSRCHMODE (Candidate Frequency Search Mode)
1. Description
This parameter determines whether the search mode on candidate frequency pilots is based on
priority and search window size.

2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD CFSC

4. Range and Units
Table 7-5 Search mode
Value Description
NOPRI No search priority or search window
PRI Search priority
SERWIN Search window
WINPRI Search priority or search window
NOPRI
You can set the value of this parameter as required.

7. Remarks
None
7.8 Pilot Beacon Hard Handoff
7.8.1 BEACONSW (Pilot Beacon HHO Switch)
1. Description
It controls whether to use pilot beacon HHO switch.
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: V2R2/V2R3/V3R1 - MOD BSCHO
V3R6C01 - MOD PHOALG

Query: V2R2/V2R3/V3R1 - LST BSCHO:;
V3R6C01 - LST HOINF

4. Range and Units
ON (ON)
OFF (OFF)
OFF
Setting the pilot beacon hardware is required when the pilot beacon is used for different
frequency hard handoff.
Therefore, the network costs increase. More beacon pilots add the interference for the system.
When the pilot beacon hard handoff is used, the coverage of beacon pilot must be consistent with
that of real pilot. Different frequency hard handoff using beacon pilot helps the MSs of IS95A
earlier search the different frequency signal strength.
It is applicable to the MSs of each revision and the successful ratio is high.
7. Remarks
The system can use pilot bean hard handoff only when a call meets the following conditions:
　 The BEACONSW is ON.
　 The beacon pilots exist in the same frequency neighbor cell of the call.
hard handoff in the protocols)
7.8.2 TADDHHOBPLT (Pilot Beacon HHO Serving Carrier Threshold)
1. Description
When the pilot strength of the soft handoff target active set is lower than this threshold, and the
pilot strength of the pilot beacon hard handoff target active set is higher than
T_HHO_PILOT_BEACON_ABS_THRESH, the pilot beacon hard handoff is triggered.

2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD HHOBPLT::
Query: V3R1/V3R6 - LST HOINF: QRYINF=HHOBPLT;

4. Range and Units
-22
The smaller the value of this parameter (for example, smaller than -32), the pooer the signals of
the source cell is when the MS performs hard handoff from the target cell to the source cell. Thus
the later the hard handoff is triggered. In this case, it is hard for the MS to receive the HDM sent
by the BTS at the source side, so the hard handoff may fail.
The greater the value of this parameter (for example, larger than -14), the triggering conditions of
hard handoff are easily met when the MS performs hard handoff. In this case, the hard handoff is
triggered mainly depending on hard handoff absolute threshold.
It is recommended that the parameter operation range is -14 ~ -32.

7. Remarks
The triggering conditions of pilot beacon hard handoff are described as follows:
Set the pilot strength of the soft handoff target active set to ShoTargEcIo; set the pilot strength of
the pilot beacon hard handoff target active set to HhoTargEcIo. When BSC receives a PSMM or
PPSMM, it calculates the previous two kinds of pilot strength. The pilot beacon hard handoff is
triggered if any of the following conditions are met:
z 　 ShoTargEcIo ≤ TADDHHOBPLT and
HhoTargEcIo ≥ THHOBPLTABSTHRS
z 　 HhoTargEcIo-ShoTargEcIo ≥ THHOBPLTRELTHRS
7.8.3 THHOBPLTABSTHRS (Pilot Beacon HHO Absolute Threshold)
1. Description
When the pilot strength of the soft handoff target active set is lower than TADDHHOBPLT, and
the pilot strength of the pilot beacon hard handoff target active set is higher than this pilot beacon
HHO absolute threshold, the pilot beacon hard handoff is triggered.

2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD HHOBPLT::

4. Range and Units
-18
The smaller the value of this parameter (for example, smaller than -28), the lower the pilot
strength for triggering the pilot beacon hard handoff in the target cell is. In this case, the pilot
beacon hard handoff can be easily triggered. However, because the signals of the target cell may
be poor, it is hard for the MS to capture the target cell. Thus hard handoff fails.
The greater the value of this parameter (for example, larger than -10), the higher the pilot strength
for triggering the pilot beacon hard handoff in the target cell is. In this case, it is easier for the MS
to capture the channels of the target cell when pilot beacon hard handoff is performed, but the
same-frequency hard handoff cannot be easily triggered.
It is recommended that the parameter operation range is -10 ~ -18.

7. Remarks
For the triggering conditions of pilot beacon hard handoff, see Remark of TADDHHOBPLT
(Pilot Beacon HHO Serving Carrier Threshold). Generally, the pilot strength of the target cell
must be higher than that of the source cell, namely, THHOBPLTABSTHRS < TADDHHOBPLT.
7.8.4 THHOBPLTRELTHRS (Pilot Beacon HHO Relative Threshold)
1. Description
When the pilot strength of the pilot beacon hard handoff target active set is
THHOBPLTRELTHRS higher than that of the soft handoff target active set, the pilot beacon
hard handoff is triggered.

2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD HHOBPLT

4. Range and Units
0~63, in the unit of 0.5 dB, that is, 0–31.5 dB
Recommended: 2～16
5
The greater the value of this parameter, the better the signals of the target cell than that of the
source cell when hard handoff is performed. Thus the easier for the MS to capture the forward
channels of the active set is. However, because the signals of the source cell are poor during the
hard handoff, the MS cannot receive the HDM of the source cell.
The smaller the value of this parameter, the easier the hard handoff is triggered, which stops the
signals of of the forward channels of the source cell from fading dramatically, and is helpful for
the MS to receive the HDM of the source cell. In this case, however, the MS cannot necessarily
capture the forward channels of the target cell.
It is recommended that the parameter operation range is 2 ~16.

7. Remarks
For the triggering conditions of pilot beacon hard handoff, see Remark of TADDHHOBPLT
(Pilot Beacon HHO Serving Carrier Threshold).
the hard handoff can be triggered in time.


Example 1
(301-3-160), configure carrier A to carrier B MAHHO
/*Add different frequency handoff relation*

7.9 HANDDOWN Hard Handoff
7.9.1 HDHHOSW (Handdown HHO Switch)
1. Description
It indicates is whether the call on a carrier can perform the handdown hard handoff.
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD PHOALG:

4. Range and Units
ON (ON)
OFF (OFF)
OFF
It is configured according to actual conditions. If the source cell and target cell have a same
channel number, and the channel numbers in the source cell are greater than that in the target cell,
the call initiated on the channel numbers in the source cell can be hard-handed off to the common
channel number of the source cell and the target cell through handdown handoff if the call is far
away from the source cell.

7. Remarks
The system uses the handdown hard handoff only when a call meets the following conditions:
　 The pilot with the strongest strength in the active set of the call is allowed to perform the
handdown hard handoff.
　 This call cannot perform mobile assisted hard handoff.
Notice that for 1X calls, if HDHHOSW is set to ON, and different frequency neighbor pilots are
configured, then the system will use Mobile Assisted HHO preferentially and forbid
HANDDOWN HHO and Direct HHO.
Besides, before HDHHOSW is set to ON, HANDDOWN HHO target carrier should be added.
7.9.2 ABSTHRS (Handdown HHO EC/IO Intensity Absolute Threshold)
1. Description
When the pilot strength of the soft handoff target active set is lower than this threshold and the
minimum RTD of the pilots in the current active set is larger than
T_HHO_HAND_DOWN_RTD, the handdown hard handoff is triggered.

2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD HNDDWN
Query: V3R1/V3R6 - LST HOINF: QRYINF=HNDDWN;

4. Range and Units
-16
corresponding threshold is. Thus the later for the handdown hard handoff is triggered. For a
dual-carrier network, the coverage area of upper later cells is larger, so heavier traffic volume can
be absorbed. If the handdown hard handoff is not triggered in time, however, the signals on the
source channel link may fade dramatically. In this case, the MS cannot receive the HDM sent on
the source channel. In addition, if the handdown hard handoff is not triggered in time, the signal
quality of lower layer target cells for handdown hard handoff cannot be guaranteed. In this case, it
is hard for the MS to access the target cell. However, this problem can be solved to some extent
through multi-target handdown hard handoff technology.
corresponding physical threshold is. Thus the handdown hard handoff is triggered earlier. In this
case, the signal quality of the lower layer target cell for handdown hard handoff is good, which is
good for the MS to access the target cell. For a dual-carrier network, however, the coverage area
of upper layer cells is small, so the upper layer cells cannot absorb traffic effectively.
7. Remarks
The triggering conditions of handdown hard handoff are as follows:
Set the pilot strength of the soft handoff target active set to ShoTargEcIo; set the minimum RTD
of the current active set to AsMinRtd.
When BSC receives a PSMM or PPSMM, the handdown hard handoff is triggered when the
following conditions are met:
　 ShoTargEcIo ≤ T_HHO_HAND_DOWN_ABS_THRESH && (AsMinRtd ≥
T_HHO_HAND_DOWN_RTD
In addition, when a call has hard handoff relationship, the system will order the MS to report the
PSMM periodically so that it can monitor the pilot strength of the active set of the source cell. In
this case, the hard handoff can be triggered in time. For details, see PMROPARA. In the R03 and
later, the offset is not used.
7.9.3 MAXRTD (Handdown HHO Max. Loop Delay Threshold)
1. Description
If the pilot strength of the soft handoff target active set is lower than
T_HHO_HAND_DOWN_ABS_THRESH, and the minimum RTD of the pilots of the current
active set is larger than the value of this parameter, the handdown hard handoff is triggered.
RTD refers loop delay, which indicates the distance between the BTS and MS. However, the
RTD sometimes is not accurately calculated due to multi-path effect and soft handoff. Each chip
is equal to about 244 meters.

2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD HNDDWN
Query: V3R1/V3R6 - LST HOINF: QRYINF=HNDDWN;

4. Range and Units
0~65535, in the unit of chip
15
The greater the value of this parameter, the larger the distance between the hard handoff band and
the source cell is and the later for the MS to perform hard handoff. In this case, the upper layer
cells of a dual-band network can absorb heavier traffic. However, the signal quality of the target
cell cannot be guaranteed.
The smaller the value of this parameter, the smaller the distance between the hard handoff band
and the source cell is and the earlier for the MS to perform hard handoff. In this case, the signal
quality of the target cell is good. From the perspective of radio signals, they are helpful for the MS
to access the target cell. However, the upper layer cells may not absorb traffic, so the traffic load
of lower layer cells is heavy.

7. Remarks
None
7.10 Same-Frequency Hard Handoff
7.10.1 SFHHOSW (Same-Frequency HHO Switch)
1. Description
It indicates whether the call on a carrier can perform the same-frequency hard handoff.
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD PHOALG

4. Range and Units
ON (ON)
OFF (OFF)
OFF
It is configured according to actual condition. If the same-frequency is not supported between
BSCs (no A3/A7 path is provided), the same-frequency hard handoff is performed. In this case,
this algorithm switch must be enabled.

7. Remarks
The system uses the same-frequency hard handoff switch only when a call meets the following
conditions:
　 The active set where the call is initiated has a carrier of the existing BSC, and the
same-frequency hard handoff algorithm switch of this carrier is enabled.
　 An external carrier used by the MS to perform the same-frequency hard handoff is configured in
the same-frequency neighbor cell of the MS.
7.10.2 TADDHHOSF (Same-Frequency HHO Serving Carrier Threshold)
1. Description
When the pilot strength of the soft handoff target active set is lower than the value of this
parameter, and the pilot strength of the same-frequency hard handoff target active set is higher
than T_HHO_SAME_FREQ_ABS_THRESH, the same-frequency hard handoff is triggered.

2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD HHOSF;
Query: V3R1/V3R6 - LST HOINF: QRYINF=HHOSF;

4. Range and Units
-22
The smaller the value of this parameter is (for example, smaller than -32), the poorer the signal
strength of the source cell side is when the MS performs hard handoff from the source cell to the
target cell, and the later the same-frequency hard handoff is triggered. Because heavy
same-frequency interference exists on the hard handoff band, if the signal of the source cell is
poor, the MS may not receive the EHDM sent by the BTS in the source cell. In this case, hard
handoff fails.
If the value of this parameter is too great (for example, larger than -14), the triggering conditions
of the same-frequency hard handoff can be easily met. In this case, the hard handoff is triggered
depending on the same-frequency HHO absolute threshold.

7. Remarks
The triggering conditions of the same-frequency hard handoff are as follows:
Set the pilot strength of the soft handoff target active set to ShoTargEcIo; set the pilot strength of
the same-frequency hard handoff target active set to HhoTargEcIo. When BSC receives a PSMM
or a PPSMM, it calculates the pilot strength of the soft handoff target active set and the pilot
strength of the same-frequency hard handoff target active set respectively. If the results meet one
of the following conditions, the same-frequency hard handoff is triggered.
　 (ShoTargEcIo ≤ T_ADD_HHO_SAME_FREQ) && (HhoTargEcIo ≥
T_HHO_SAME_FREQ_ABS_THRESH)
　 (HhoTargEcIo - ShoTargEcIo) ≥ T_HHO_SAME_FREQ_REL_THRESH
7.10.3 THHOSFABSTHRS (Same-frequency HHO Target Carrier Threshold)
1. Description
When the pilot strength of the soft handoff target active set is lower than
T_ADD_HHO_SAME_FREQ, and the pilot strength of the same-frequency hard handoff target
active set is higher than the value of this parameter, the same-frequency hard handoff is triggered.
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD HHOSF

4. Range and Units
-18
The smaller the value of this parameter (for example, smaller than -28), the lower the pilot
strength for triggering the same-frequency hard handoff in the target cell is. In this case, the
same-frequency hard handoff can be easily triggered. However, because the signals in the target
cell may be poor, it is hard for the MS to access a target cell. Thus hard handoff fails.
The greater the value of this parameter (for example, larger than -10), the higher the pilot strength
for triggering the same-frequency hard handoff in the target cell is. In this case, it is easier for the
MS to access the target cell, but the same-frequency hard handoff cannot be easily triggered.
7. Remarks
For more the triggering conditions of the same-frequency hard handoff, see 7. Remark of
TADDHHOSF (Same-Frequency HHO Serving Carrier Threshold).
Generally, the pilot strength of the target cell must be higher than that of the source cell, namely,
T_HHO_SAME_FREQ_ABS_THRESH < T_ADD_HHO_SAME_FREQ.
7.10.4 THHOSFRELTHRS (Same-frequency HHO Relative Threshold)
1. Description
When the pilot strength of the same-frequency hard handoff target set and the pilot strength of the
soft handoff target active set are higher than the same-frequency HHO relative threshold, the
same-frequency hard handoff is triggered.

2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD HHOSF

4. Range and Units
0~63, in the unit of 0.5 dB ( that is, 0~31.5 dB)
5
The greater the value of this parameter, the stronger the signals in the hard handoff target cell is
higher than that in the source cell, so the easier for the MS to access a forward channel in the
target cell. However, because the signals in the source cell for hard handoff are poor, the MS may
not receive the HDM of the source cell.
The smaller the value of this parameter, the easier for the hard handoff to be triggered. In this case,
the signals on the forward channels of the source cells side do not deteriorate dramatically, which
is good for the MS to receive the HDM of the original cell, but the MS may not receive the access
a forward channel of the source cell.

7. Remarks
For the triggering conditions of same-frequency hard handoff, see 7. Remark of TADDHHOSF
(Same-Frequency HHO Serving Carrier Threshold).
the hard handoff can be triggered in time. For details, see the PMROPARA.
If the value of T_HHO_SAME_FREQ_REL_THRESH is equal to or smaller than that of
T_COMP, the signal strength of the active pilot for hard handoff is T-COMP higher than the
T-COMP of the active set, the MS reports a PSMM automatically to trigger same-frequency hard
handoff. In this case, the MS needs not to report the PSMM to the system periodically.
Example 1
(301-3-160), configure carrier A to carrier B SFHHO
/* Carrier B*/
ADD CDMACH: CN=300, SCTID=3, CRRIDLST="10", ARFCNLST="283",
TYP=CDMA2000, IFBCDMACH=NO, CCLMFLG=YES, ECCLMFLG=YES;
/* Carrier A******** Carrier B*/
7.11 Load Balance Hard Handoff
7.11.1 LBHHOSW (load balance HHO switch)
1. Description
This parameter configures whether the load balance hard handoff is allowed for calls on the
carrier.
2. Type

3. Command Name
Modify: MOD PHOALG

4. Range and Unit
ON(ON) / OFF(OFF)
OFF
6. Setting Tradeoff
None
7. Remarks
(1) The load balance HHO is a carrier-class parameter. If the carrier reported by the link
measurement report supports the load balance HHO, then the system decides for load balance
HHO. Each branch makes its own decision according to the configured threshold. If there is a
branch that satisfies the threshold, the load balance HHO is triggered.
(2) The commands to configure the target carrier for the load balance HHO are: ADD
HHOLOADTRG, RMV HHOLOADTRG, MOD HHOLOADTRG, and LST
HHOLOADTRG.
(3) This parameter is used for load balance between different frequencies of different bands. (The
traffic distribution and load balance between different frequencies of the same band is achieved
through hard assignment.)
(4) Because the inter-BSC load information cannot be obtained, inter-BSC load balance hard
handoff is not supported.
(5) After the load balance HHO algorithm is triggered, the MS-aided hard handoff is used.
Therefore only MSs of 95B and later versions support this function. only MSs of 95B and later
versions support this function.
(6) In more accurate terms, the load balance HHO is a load control algorithm instead of a hard
handoff algorithm. The hard handoff is to distribute the load evenly among the frequencies
instead of to provide better service to the terminals. The load balance HHO is decided on the basis
of forward and reverse load. For the trigger conditions, see the Principles volume.
7.11.2 OLBHHOFLTHRESH (outgoing load balance HHO forward load

threshold)
1. Description
If the forward load of the carrier is greater than or equal to this threshold and the number of
equivalent reverse users is greater than or equal to the outgoing load balance HHO user
number threshold, the carrier is overloaded.
If the source carrier is overloaded and there is a target carrier that is not overloaded, the load
balance HHO is triggered.

2. Type

3. Command Name
Modify: MOD HHOLOAD
Query: V3R1/V3R6 - LST HOINF: QRYINF=HHOLOAD;

4. Range and Unit
0 to 1000 (unit: %)
100
6. Setting Tradeoff
You should set the related parameters according to the load of the source carrier and target carrier.
7. Remarks
None
7.11.3 ILBHHOFLTHRESH (incoming load balance HHO forward load

threshold)
1. Description
if the forward load of a target carrier is less than or equal to this threshold and the number of
equivalent reverse users is less than or equal to the incoming load balance HHO user number ,
the carrier is not overloaded.

2. Type

3. Command Name
Modify: MOD HHOLOAD
Query: V3R1/V3R6 - LST HOINF: QRYINF= HHOLOAD;

4. Range and Unit
0 to 1000 (unit: %)
80
6. Setting Tradeoff
None.
7. Remarks
None
7.11.4 LBHHOFLRTHRESH (load balance HHO forward load relative

threshold)
1. Description
When both of the following two conditions are satisfied, the source carrier is overloaded:
z The difference between the forward load of the source carrier and the forward load of the carrier
with the lightest load among the target carriers of the load balance HHO is greater than or equal
to this threshold.
z The difference between the number of equivalent reverse users of the source carrier and the
number of equivalent reverse users of the carrier with the smallest number among the target
carriers of the load balance HHO is greater than or equal to the load balance HHO user number
relative threshold.

2. Type

3. Command Name
Modify: MOD HHOLOAD

4. Range and Unit
0 to 1000 (unit: %)
40
6. Setting Tradeoff
None
7. Remarks
None
7.11.5 OLBHHOUNTHRESH (outgoing load balance HHO user number

threshold)
1. Description
If the forward load of a carrier is greater than or equal to outgoing load balance HHO forward
load threshold and the number of equivalent reverse users is greater than or equal to this
threshold, the carrier is overloaded.

2. Type

3. Command Name
Modify: MOD HHOLOAD
Query: V3R1/V3R6 - LST HOINF: QRYINF= HHOLOAD

4. Range and Unit
0 to 1000 (unit: 0.1)
300
6. Setting Tradeoff
None
7. Remarks
None
7.11.6 ILBHHOUNTHRESH (incoming load balance HHO user number
threshold)
1. Description
if the forward load of a target carrier is less than or equal to the incoming load balance HHO
forward load threshold and the number of equivalent reverse users is less than or equal to this
threshold, the carrier is not overloaded.

2. Type

3. Command Name
Modify: MOD HHOLOAD

4. Range and Unit
0 to 1000 (unit: 0.1)
240
6. Setting Tradeoff
None
7. Remarks
None
7.11.7 LBHHOUNRTHRESH (load balance HHO user number relative

threshold)
1. Description
When both of the following two conditions are satisfied, the source carrier is overloaded:
z 　 The difference between the forward load of the source carrier and the forward load of the
carrier with the lightest load among the target carriers of the load balance HHO is greater than or
equal to the load balance HHO forward load relative threshold.
z 　 The difference between the number of equivalent reverse users of the source carrier and
the number of equivalent reverse users of the carrier with the smallest number among the target
carriers of the load balance HHO is greater than or equal to this threshold.

2. Type

3. Command Name
Modify: MOD HHOLOAD

4. Range and Unit
0 to 1000 (unit: 0.1)
120
6. Setting Tradeoff
None
7. Remarks
None
7.11.8 LBHHOETHRESH (load balance hard handoff stop threshold)
1. Description
After the BSC starts the load balance hard handoff procedure, it selects some of the calls on the
source carrier whose branch forward TX power is greater than the load balance hard handoff
trigger power threshold and hard hands over them to the target carrier, thus alleviating the load of
the source carrier. When the forward load of the carrier minus the sum of the selected branch
powers is less than or equal to this parameter, the BSC stops selecting the calls.
2. Type

3. Command Name
Modify: MOD HHOLOAD
4. Range and Unit
0–255, unit: 0.01
60
6. Setting Tradeoff
None
7. Remarks
None
7.11.9 LBHHOPTHRESH (load balance HHO trigger power threshold)
1. Description
When the BSC decides that a carrier meets the load balance HHO trigger condition, it selects
some of the calls on the source carrier whose branch forward TX power is greater than the load
balance hard handoff trigger power threshold and hard hands over them to the target carrier,
thus alleviating the load of the source carrier. When the forward load of the carrier minus the sum
of the selected branch powers is less than or equal to the load-balanced hard handoff stop
threshold, the BSC stops selecting the calls.

2. Type

3. Command Name
Modify: MOD HHOLOAD

4. Range and Unit
–255 to 0 (unit: 0.5 dB)
-48
6. Setting Tradeoff
None
7. Remarks
None
7.11.10 OLBHHOCNUM (load balance HHO number of outgoing calls)
1. Description
The number of calls that can go out during a load-balanced hard handoff is determined by this
parameter.
2. Type

3. Command Name
Modify: MOD HHOLOAD

4. Range and Unit
0–5
2
6. Setting Tradeoff
None
7. Remarks
None
7.12 Link Quality Hard Handoff
7.12.1 FWDLQHHOSW (forward link quality hard handoff switch)
1. Description
This parameter configures whether the forward link quality handoff is allowed for calls on the
carrier.
2. Type

3. Command Name
Modify: MOD PHOALG
Query: V3R1/V3R6 - LST HOINF: QRYINF= PHOALG;
4. Range and Unit
ON(ON) / OFF(OFF)
OFF
6. Setting Tradeoff
None
7. Remarks
None
7.12.2 REVLQHHOSW (reverse link quality hard handoff switch)
1. Description
This parameter configures whether the reverse link quality handoff is allowed for calls on the
carrier.
2. Type

3. Command Name
Modify: MOD HHOLOAD

4. Range and Unit
ON(ON) / OFF(OFF)
OFF
6. Setting Tradeoff
None
7. Remarks
None
7.12.3 THHOLQABSTHRESH (pilot strength trigger threshold for link quality
HHO)
1. Description
When the serving pilot strength reported by the MS is less than the value of this parameter and the
forward FER is greater than the value of forward FER trigger threshold for link quality HHO,
the handoff to the target carrier is triggered.

2. Type

3. Command Name
Modify: MOD HHOLQ
Query: V3R1/V3R6 - LST HOINF: QRYINF= HHOLQ;

4. Range and Unit
–63 to 0 (unit: 0.5 dB)
-24
6. Setting Tradeoff
None
7. Remarks
None
7.12.4 THHOLQFWDFERTHRESH (Forward FER trigger threshold for link

quality hard handoff)
1. Description
When the serving pilot strength reported by the MS is less than the value of pilot strength
trigger threshold for link quality HHO and the forward FER is greater than the value of this
parameter, the handoff to the target carrier is triggered.

2. Type

3. Command Name
Modify: MOD HHOLQ

4. Range and Unit
0 to 31 (unit: %)
10
6. Setting Tradeoff
None
7. Remarks
None
7.12.5 THHOLQREVFERTHRESH (reverse FER trigger threshold for link

quality HHO)
1. Description
When the serving pilot strength reported by the MS is less than the value of pilot strength
trigger threshold for link quality HHO and the reverse FER is greater than the value of this
parameter, the handoff to the target carrier is triggered.

2. Type

3. Command Name
Modify: MOD HHOLQ

4. Range and Unit
0 to 31 (unit: %)
10
6. Setting Tradeoff
None
7. Remarks
None
7.13 Weak Coverage Soft Handoff
7.13.1 WCSHOSW (weak coverage soft handoff switch)
1. Description
This parameter configures whether the weak coverage soft handoff is allowed for calls on the
carrier.
2. Type

3. Command Name
Modify: MOD PHOALG

4. Range and Unit
ON(ON) / OFF(OFF)
OFF
6. Setting Tradeoff
This parameter is configured according to the actual situation. If the carrier load is low and the
coverage is uneven (Some areas have good coverage while other areas have bad coverage.) this
function shall be turned on, so that the users in the areas of bad coverage can enjoy greater TX
power and soft handoff gain.

7. Remarks
(1) The weak coverage soft handoff switch is carrier-class. When the weak coverage soft handoff
switch of all the branches in the active set is off, the weak coverage soft handoff switch is off.
(2) Upon call setup, by default the MS is under good coverage.
(3) Bad coverage status is not judged for data service calls.
(4) Before the weak coverage soft handoff delay timer times out, the transition between the good
coverage status and the bad coverage status is not allowed to prevent the impact of large signaling
flow on the system. (Note: There are a timer for bad coverage status and a timer for good
coverage status.
7.13.2 APTSW (power adjustment threshold switch)
1. Description
This parameter specifies whether an MS under weak coverage shall notify the BTS to improve the
forward power threshold of the call under the prerequisite that the load allows.
2. Type

3. Command Name
Modify: MOD WSHO
Query: V3R1/V3R6 - LST HOINF: QRYINF=WSHO;

4. Range and Unit
ON(ON) / OFF(OFF)
OFF
6. Setting Tradeoff
None.
7. Remarks
Upon receiving the PMRM and Link_Rpt messages, the system decides for weak coverage soft
handoff. If the conditions are met, the BSC improves the forward maximum power configuration
and notifies the BTS to increase the forward code channel power to the new maximum
configuration, so that the MS can have better power resource, thus preventing call drop.
7.13.3 AASBNSW (switch for adjusting number of branches in the active set)
1. Description
This parameter specifies whether an MS under weak coverage can add more branches to the
active set. The maximum number of branches in the active set is determined by the parameter
maximum number of branches in the active set.

2. Type

3. Command Name
Modify: MOD WSHO

4. Range and Unit
ON(ON) / OFF(OFF)
OFF
6. Setting Tradeoff
None.
7. Remarks
When the parameter AASBNSW of one branch in the active set is on, the parameter
WSHO_MAX_BRACH_NUM under weak coverage status is used for deciding a handoff.
7.13.4 AHWSW (handoff method adjustment switch)
1. Description
When an MS is under weak coverage, this parameter specifies whether the system shall use the
handoff threshold under weak coverage status for handoff decision.

2. Type

3. Command Name
Modify: MOD WSHO

4. Range and Unit
ON(ON) / OFF(OFF)
OFF
6. Setting Tradeoff
None.
7. Remarks
As long as the parameter AHWSW of one branch in the current active set is on, perform the
following operations:
Modify the condition for deleting a branch as follows:

ActEcIo<=Min { WSHO_T_DROP , ActMaxEcIo – WSHO_TRIGGER_REL_THRESH }
Modify the condition for adding a branch as follows:
NvrEcIo>=Min{WSHO_T_ADD , ActMaxEcIo – WSHO_TRIGGER_REL_THRESH}
Modify the condition for substituting a branch as follows:
NbrEcIo – ActEcIo>=WSHO_T_COMP
where,
ActEcIo indicates the pilot strength of the pilots in the active set.
ActMaxEcIo indicates the maximum pilot strength of the current active set.
NbrEcIo indicates the pilot strength of the neighbor pilot.
WSHO_T_ADD indicates the threshold for adding a pilot to the weak coverage soft handoff.
WSHO_T_DROP indicates the threshold for deleting a pilot from the weak coverage soft
handoff.
WSHO_T_COMP indicates the threshold for substituting a pilot of the weak coverage soft
handoff.
WSHO_TRIGGER_REL_THRESH indicates the relative threshold for deciding a weak
coverage soft handoff.
7.13.5 AHTSW (switch for adjusting handoff threshold)
1. Description
When an MS is under weak coverage, this parameter specifies whether to notify the MS to lower
the handoff thresholds such as T_ADD. The new handoff thresholds are T_ADD, T_DROP,
T_COMP, TDROPTIMER, SHOSLOPE, SHOADDINC, and SHODROPINC.

2. Type

3. Command Name
Modify: MOD WSHO

4. Range and Unit
ON(ON) / OFF(OFF)
OFF
6. Setting Tradeoff
None.
7. Remarks
When the system receives the PMRM and Link_Rpt messages and judges that the MS is in bad
coverage, if the AHTSW of one branch in the active set is on, then the system delivers the soft
handoff threshold under weak coverage status to the MS.
7.14 Coverage of Ultra-remote Cells
7.14.1 NSRCHWINOFFSETINC (search window offset of the neighbor set

branch is included or not)
1. Description
This parameter indicates whether the search window offset of the neighbor set branch is valid.
2. Type

3. Command Name
Modify: MOD SFNBRPARA (same-frequence) MOD DFNBRPARA (diff-frequence)
Query: LST SFNBRPARA (same-frequence) / LST DFNBRPARA (diff-frequence )

4. Range and Unit
Included/not included.
Not included.
6. Setting Tradeoff
When the value of this parameter is Not Included, by default the search window offset of the
neighbor set branch is 0.

7. Remarks
None
7.14.2 NSRCHWINOFFSET (search window offset of the neighbor set)
1. Description
This parameter specifies the size of the search window offset for the neighbor set. The value of
this parameter plus the size of the search window is the range of the distance to the reference pilot
where the MS can search.

2. Type

3. Command Name
Modify: MOD SFNBRPARA (same-frequence) MOD DFNBRPARA (diff-frequence)
Query: LST SFNBRPARA (same-frequence) / LST DFNBRPARA (diff-frequence )

4. Range and Unit
OFFSET0/ OFFSET1/ OFFSET2/ OFFSET3/ OFFSET4/ OFFSET5/ OFFSET6. 0 lists the actual
offset values corresponding to the values of the parameter.

Offset values corresponding to the offset indexes
Offset Index Offset ( PN chips)
OFFSET0 0
OFFSET1 0.5*Search Window
OFFSET2 1*Search Window
OFFSET3 1.5*Search Window
OFFSET4 -0.5*Search Window
OFFSET5 -1*Search Window
OFFSET6 -1.5*Search Window
OFFSET0
6. Setting Tradeoff
None
7. Remarks
None
7.15 General Neighbor List Messages Relative Parameters
7.15.1 SRCHMD (Search Mode)
1. Description
It indicates the search mode.
Table 7-6 describes the search mode and values.
Table 7-6 Search mode and values
Value (bin) Description
00 No search priority or search window
01 Search priority
10 Search window
11 Search priority or search window
2. Type
It is an Um interface parameter, sent in the GNLM.
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD GNLM
Query: LST SYSMSGPARA: CCMINF=GNLM;

4. Range and Units
NOPRI – NO SEARCH PRIORITY OR SEARCH WINDOW
PRI – SEARCH PRIORITY
SERWINI – SEARCH WINDOW
SERPR2 –SEARCH PRIORITY OR SEARCH WINDOW

PRI
It is set based on actual conditions.
7. Remarks
None
7.15.2 NBRCFGPNINCL (Neighbor Configuration and Pseudo Noise Code
Offset Included)
1. Description
It controls whether a pilot includes neighbor configuration and pseudo noise code offset.
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD GNLM

4. Range and Units
YES/NO
YES
If neighbor configuration and pseudo noise code offset are included, the value of this parameter is
YES. Otherwise, the value is NO.

7. Remarks
None
7.15.3 FREQFLDSINCL (Frequency Fields Included)
1. Description
It controls whether the adjacency of a carrier includes frequency field.
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD GNLM

4. Range and Units
YES/NO
YES
If the frequency field is included, the value of this parameter is YES. Otherwise, the value is NO.
7. Remarks
None
7.15.4 USETM (Use Timing Indicator)
1. Description
It controls whether neighbor BTS uses the timing information.
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD GNLM

4. Range and Units
YES/NO
NO
If the timing information of BTS is used for the neighbor BTS, the value of this parameter is YES.
Otherwise, the value is NO.

7. Remarks
None
7.15.5 SRCHOFS (Neighbor PICH Search Window Size Offset Included)
1. Description
If SRCH_OFFSET_NGHBR field is included in the GNLM, the BTS sets the value of this
parameter to 1. If not, the BTS sets the value of this parameter to 0.
2. Type
Air interface parameter (General Neighbor List Message)
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD GNLM

4. Range and Units
YES（Include）/NO(Not include)
NO
None
7. Remarks
None
Chapter 8 1X Data Service Parameters
8.1 SCH Assignment Parameters
8.1.1 FWDCENPLTTHRS (Forward Central Area Pilot Strength

Threshold)/FWDTRANPLTTHRS (Forward Transition Pilot
Threshold)/FWDBDR4XPLTTHRS (Forward Border 4X Pilot
Threshold)/FWDBDR2XPLTTHRS (Forward Border 2X Pilot
Threshold)/FWDBDR1XPLTTHRS (Forward Border 1X Pilot Threshold)
1. Description
z 　 FWDCENPLTTHRS
The pilot strength of the assigned forward SCH over 8X cannot be lower than this central pilot
strength threshold, which indicates the minimum Ec/Io threshold for assigning 16X SCH or 32X
SCH.
z 　 FWDTRANPLTTHRS
The pilot strength of the assigned forward SCH over 4X cannot be lower than this transition pilot
strength threshold, which indicates the minimum Ec/Io threshold for assigning 8X SCH.
z 　 FWDBDR4XPLTTHRS
The pilot strength of the assigned forward SCH over 2X cannot be lower than this forward border
4X pilot strength threshold, which indicates the minimum Ec/Io threshold for assigning 4X SCH.
The pilot strength of the assigned forward SCH over 1X cannot be lower than this forward border
The pilot strength of the assigned forward SCH over or up to 1X cannot be lower than this
forward border 1X pilot strength threshold, which indicates the minimum Ec/Io threshold for
assigning 1X SCH.
2. Type
This parameter is an internal parameter.
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD SCH
Query: LST RRMINF: RRMINF=SCH;

4. Range and Unit
−63 to 0 (unit: 0.5 dB)
Rate Default Value
FWDBDR1XPLTTHRS −30
FWDTRANPLTTHRS −22
FWDCENPLTTHRS −18
6. Setting Tradeoff
None.
7. Remarks
None.
8.1.2 REVCENPLTTHRS (Reverse Central Pilot

Threshold)/REVTRANPLTTHRS (Reverse Transition Pilot
Threshold)/REVBDR4XPLTTHRS (Reverse Border 4X Pilot
Threshold)/REVBDR2XPLTTHRS (Reverse Border 2X Pilot
Threshold)/REVBDR1XPLTTHRS (Reverse Border 1X Pilot Threshold)
1. Description
z REVBDRCENPLTTHRS
The pilot strength of the assigned reverse SCH over 8X cannot be lower than this reverse central
pilot strength threshold, which indicates the minimum Ec/Io threshold for assigning 16X SCH or
32X SCH.
z REVBDRTRANPLTTHRS
The pilot strength of the assigned reverse SCH over 4X cannot be lower than this reverse
transition pilot strength threshold, which indicates the minimum Ec/Io threshold for assigning 8X
SCH.
z REVBDR4XPLTTHRS
The pilot strength of the assigned reverse SCH over 2X cannot be lower than this reverse border
z REVBDR2XPLTTHRS
The pilot strength of the assigned reverse SCH over 1X cannot be lower than this reverse border
z REVBDR1XPLTTHR
The pilot strength of the assigned reverse SCH e over or up to 1X cannot be lower than this
reverse border 1X pilot strength threshold, which indicates the minimum Ec/Io threshold for
assigning 1X SCH.
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD SCH

4. Range and Unit
−63 to 0 (unit: 0.5 dB)
Rate Default Value
REVBDR1XPLTTHRS −30
REVBDRTRANPLTTHRS −24
REVBDRCENPLTTHRS −18
6. Setting Tradeoff
None.
7. Remarks
None.
8.1.3 R1XDRT (Reverse 1XSCH Duration)/R2XDRT (Reverse 2XSCH

Duration)/R4XDRT (Reverse 4XSCH Duration)/R8XDRT (Reverse 8XSCH
Duration)/R16XDRT (Reverse 16XSCH Duration)/R32XDRT (Reverse
32XSCH Duration)
1. Description
These parameters specify the assigned duration for the reverse 1X to 32X SCH.
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD SCH

4. Range and Unit
FRAME1 (1FRAME)
FRAME2 (2FRAME)
FRAME3 (3FRAME)
FRAME4 (4FRAME)
FRAME5 (5FRAME)
FRAME6 (6FRAME)
FRAME7 (7FRAME)
FRAME8 (8FRAME)
FRAME16 (16FRAME)
FRAME32 (32FRAME)
FRAME64 (64FRAME)
FRAME96 (96FRAME)
FRAME128 (128FRAME)
FRAME256 (256FRAME)
STATIC (STATIC ALLOCATION)
Rate Default Value
R1XDRT FRAME256
R2XDRT FRAME256
R4XDRT FRAME256
R8XDRT FRAME128
R16XDRT FRAME128
R32XDRT FRAME128
6. Setting Tradeoff
None.
7. Remarks
None.
8.1.4 SCHRELDTXDUR (DTX Duration)
1. Description
This parameter indicates the duration of reverse SCH discontinuous transmission (DTX).
If the MS stops sending data on the reverse SCH and does not resend data within the specified
duration, the MS automatically releases the reverse SCH.
This parameter helps to optimize R-SCH resources. When this parameter is set to 15, the MS does
not release the reverse SCH after the burst transmission is over.
2. Type
This parameter is an Um interface parameter (SCAM/ GHDM/ ESCAM).
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD MCHM
Query: LST MCHM

4. Range and Unit
1 1 frame
2 2 frames
3 3 frames
4 4 frames
5 5 frames
6 6 frames
7 7 frames
8 8 frames
9 16 frames
10 32 frames
11 64 frames
12 96 frames
13 128 frames
14 256 frames
15 Forever
9 (16 frames)
6. Setting Tradeoff
None.
7. Remarks
None.
8.1.5 TFAC (Physical Channel Transmission Efficiency Factor)
1. Description
This parameter is used to assign F-SCH duration. It is used to compensate the impact of the
protocol layer overhead on the duration, that is, Forward duration = Traffic to be transmitted
(application layer)/transmission rate (physical layer). The industry experiences show that the rate
of the application layer is 13% lower than the physical layer due to protocol layer overhead.
2. Type
This parameter is an internal Carrier parameter.
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD SCH
Query: CHMINF: QRYINF=SCH;

4. Range and Unit
0 ~100(unit: 1%)
80
6. Setting Tradeoff
Generally, this parameter need not be modified.
7.Remarks
None
8.1.6 SPT16XREVSCH (16X R-SCH Support Switch)
1. Description
This parameter indicates whether to switch on the maximum R-SCH rate supported.
When the switch is ON, the maximum rate is 16X.

2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD MCHM
Query: LST MCHM

4. Range and Unit
ON (on)
OFF (off)
ON
6. Setting Tradeoff
None.
7. Remarks
None.
8.1.7 FWDSTOBTHR (Forward SCH to Basic Threshold)
1. Description
This parameter indicates the forward SCH admission threshold offset by the basic forward
admission threshold.
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD FLDCTRL
Query: LST RRMINF: RRMINF=FLDCTRL;

4. Range and Unit
−10000 to 0 (unit: 0.1%)
−100
6. Setting Tradeoff
Generally, this parameter need not be modified.
7.Remarks
This parameter works only when the Ec/Ior algorithm of forward load control is enabled.
8.1.8 E1XDATEQU (Data Service FCH (1XSCH) Equivalent

Channels)/E2XDAT EQU (Data Service 2XSCH Equivalent
Channels)/E32XDAT EQU (Data Service 32XSCH Equivalent Channels)
1. Description
These parameters specifies the number of RC3 voice call channels equivalent to a reverse 1X to
32X data service channel.

2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD CHINF
Query: LST RRMINF: RRMINF=CHINFO;

4. Range and Unit
0−255 (unit: 0.1)
Rate Default Value
1X 25
2X 40
4X 75
8X 130
16X 220
32X 400
6. Setting Tradeoff
None.
7. Remarks
Huawei suggest that the recommended values should not be modified.
8.2 Forward SCH Soft Handoff Parameters
8.2.1 FWDSCHSHOSW (Forward SCH Soft Handoff Switch)
1. Description
This parameter indicates whether to enable the soft handoff of forward SCH.
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD MCHM
Query: LST MCHM

4. Range and Unit
ON (on)
OFF (off)
OFF
6. Setting Tradeoff
When the forward SCH soft handoff is enabled, the utilization of soft handoff gain can improve
the reliability of the link and decrease the impact of radio link changing to SCH transmission
performance. Meanwhile, more resources (such as power, WALSH, and CE) will be consumed,
and forward interference will be increased.

7. Remarks
This function is applicable to the scene of forward data transmission in the soft handoff area.
8.2.2 FWDSASTHR (FSCH Soft Handoff Initial Threshold)
1. Description
This parameter specifies the threshold for the initial active set branch selection of the forward
SCH. When selecting the branches for forward SCH initial active set, first select all the branches
whose pilot strength is not higher than this threshold ( the real meaning is stronger than this
threshold) from the FCH active set, where the strongest branch must be added to the initial SCH
active set.
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD MCHM
Query: LST MCHM

4. Range and Unit
−6300 to 0 (unit: 1/200 dB)
−1600 (−8 dB)
6. Setting Tradeoff
If the parameter is set to a large value, it means not to implement initial active set branch selection
from the FCH, all the pilots in the active set of FCH are added to the initial active set of forward
SCH.
7. Remarks
None.
8.2.3 FWDSASMAXNUM (FSCH Soft Handoff Max. Branch Number)
1. Description
This parameter indicates the maximum number of branches in the target active set of forward
SCH soft handoff.

2. Type
This parameter is an internal BSC algorithm parameter.
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD MCHM
Query: LST MCHM

4. Range and Unit
1−6
3
It should not be modified.

6. Setting Tradeoff
If the value of this parameter is too great, the SCH soft handoff ratio increases, too many forward
resources are seized and forward capacity is wasted.
If the value of this parameter is too small, the SCH soft handoff ratio decreases, but the soft
handoff gain cannot be used properly and the transmission performance of data service may
decrease.
7. Remarks
They are similar to that of MAXSHO (Maximum Number of SHO Branches).
8.3 Forward SCH Extension Parameters
8.3.1 FWDSCHEXTSW (Forward SCH Extension Switch)
1. Description
This parameter indicates whether to enable forward SCH extension function.
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD CHM
Query: LST CHM

4. Range and Unit
ON (on)
OFF (off)
ON
6. Setting Tradeoff
When the SCH extension function is enabled, it can improve the throughput. But because the
spending of extension signal is large, it will increase the SPU CPU occupation.
When the SCH extension function is disabled, only dynamic allocation is used. SCH release and
reallocation will cause big gap of data transmission, so the timeslot utilization ratio is decreased.
7. Remarks
SCH extension is applicable to the scene that pilot strength is stable and load is light, not
applicable to the scene that pilot strength fluctuates severely or forward load changes severely.
8.3.2 FWDSCHVARRATESW (F-SCH Variety Rate Switch)
1. Description
This parameter specifies whether to enable the SCH adjustable rate function.
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD MCHM
Query: LST MCHM

4. Range and Unit
ON (on)
OFF (off)
OFF
6. Setting Tradeoff
When the SCH variety rate function is enabled, it can improve the throughput. But because the
spending of variety rate extension signal is large, it will increase the SPU CPU occupation.
When the SCH extension function is disabled, only dynamic allocation is used. SCH release and
reallocation will cause big gap of data transmission, so the timeslot utilization ratio is decreased.
7. Remarks
To enable this parameter, FWDSCHEXTSW (Forward SCH Extension Switch) should be set to
ON.
To enable the forward scheduling, this parameter should be set to ON.
SCH extension is applicable to the scene that pilot strength is stable and load is light, not
applicable to the scene that pilot strength fluctuates severely or forward load changes severely.
When this function is enabled, the SCH fixed rate extension function is disabled, the SCH
variable rate extension is working.
8.4 Reverse SCH Soft Handoff Parameters
8.4.1 REVSCHSHOSW (Reverse SCH Soft Handoff Switch)
1. Description
This parameter indicates whether to enable the soft handoff of reverse SCH.
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD MCHM
Query: LST MCHM

4. Range and Unit
ON (on)
OFF (off)
0
6. Setting Tradeoff
When the function is enabled, make use of the soft handoff gain, it can improve the link reliability
and decrease impact of radio link changing to the SCH transmission performance; at the same
time more resources (such as CE, Abis link) are consumes.

7. Remarks
This function is applicable to uplink data transmission in the BTS overlapped areas.
8.4.2 REVSASTHR (RSCH Soft Handoff Initial Threshold)
1. Description
This parameter indicates the threshold for reverse SCH active set decision.
When the active set of reverse SCH makes decision, whether a branch is added to the active set of
reverse SCH is based on the comparison between decision variable of reverse link and the
parameter. If the difference is large than this threshold, the branch can be added to the active set;
if the difference is smaller than this threshold, the branch cannot be added to the active set.
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD MCHM
Query: LST MCHM

4. Range and Unit
−255 to 0 (unit: 0.25 dB)
−32 (-8dB)
6. Setting Tradeoff
The larger this parameter, the higher the threshold, the smaller the difference of the pilot strength
of the branches to be added to the active set, and the harder the branches can be added to the
active set.
The smaller this parameter, the lower the threshold, the easier the branches can be added to the
active set.
7. Remarks
The recommended value −24 means that the whole active set of the FCH is selected for that of the
SCH.
Huawei suggests that this parameter should not be modified.
8.4.3 REVSASMAXNUM (RSCH Soft Handoff Max. Leg Number)
1. Description
This parameter indicates the maximum number of permitted branches of reverse SCH active set.
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD MCHM
Query: LST MCHM

4. Range and Unit
1−6
3
6. Setting Tradeoff
The smaller this parameter, the less the resource occupation is.
The larger this parameter, the more the soft handoff gain is used.
7. Remarks
Huawei suggests that this parameter should not be modified.
When there are softer handoff only, it can occupy little system resource while make use of the soft
handoff gain. So in the current version, we can set REVSCHSHOSW to ON and set the
REVSASMAXNUM to 1, to enable the softer handoff only.
8.5 Reverse SCH Extension Parameters
8.5.1 REVSCHEXTSW (reverse SCH Extension Switch)
1. Description
Switch of reverse SCH extension function
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD MCHM
Query: LST MCHM

4. Range and Unit
ON (on)
OFF (off)
ON
6. Setting Tradeoff
None.
7. Remarks
None.
8.5.2 REVSCHEXTFOREDURSW (R-SCH Extension Forever Duration

Switch)
1. Description
This parameter indicates whether to switch on the infinite duration of the assigned reverse SCH.
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD MCHM
Query: LST MCHM

4. Range and Unit
ON (on)
OFF (off)
OFF
6. Setting Tradeoff
None.
7. Remarks
If REVSCHVARRATESW is set to OFF, this parameter is also set to OFF.
8.5.3 REVSCHVARRATESW (R-SCH Variety Rate Switch)
1. Description
This parameter indicates whether to enable the R-SCH adjustable rate function.
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD MCHM
Query: LST MCHM

4. Range and Unit
ON (on)
OFF (off)
OFF
6. Setting Tradeoff
If this function is switched on, SCH variety rate extension can improve the uplink throughput.
But because the signaling processing spending is comparatively big, the SPU CPU occupation is
increased also.
If this function is switched off, dynamic allocation is used, which causes the transmission gap
during SCH release and reallocation and decreases the timeslot efficiency.
7. Remarks
To switch on this function, the reverse SCH extension function must be switched on.
SCH extension is applicable to the scene that the pilot strength is relatively stable and load is light,
not applicable to the scene that the pilot strength fluctuates severely or the load changes greatly
To switch on this function, the R-SCH extension forever duration function must be switched on.
8.6 QoS of the 1x Data Service
8.6.1 QOSFUNSW (1x data service QoS function switch)
1. Description
This parameter controls the on and off of the 1x data service QoS.
2. Type

3. Command Name
Modify: MOD QoS
Query: LST QoS:;

4. Range and Unit
OFF or ON, OFF meaning disabled and ON enabled.
5. Default value
OFF, meaning that the QoS function is disabled.

6. Setting Tradeoff
When this function is enabled, the system provides data service of different QoS to users of
different priorities and effectively utilizes the system capacity. When the function is disabled, the
system does not provide differentiated service according to the user priorities.
7. Remarks
At present the function only schedules the forward SCH and does not schedule the reverse SCH.
In the CDMA2000 1X network, if the HLR and MSC are not Huawei products or the HLR and
MSC are of old version and do not support the QoS, the dedicated line and QoS shall be disabled.
(The HLR that supports this function is V66.)
Like the BSC, the WLL also has the QoS function, but their user class setting method is different.
For the BSC, the user class is set on the HLR, whereas the WLL subscription data is in the BSC
and therefore the user class is set on the BSC.

When the QoS function is disabled, the data service of all users is processed like ordinary users.
At this time, if the data service scheduling switch is enabled, the 1x data service is scheduled
regardless of the QoS to provide fair service for all the data service users. If this switch is not
enabled, the users are served on a first-come first-served basis.
8.6.2 GOLDFSCHRATE / SILVERFSCHRATE / BRONZEFSCHRATE
1. Description
This parameter specifies the maximum FSCH rate allowed for the gold, silver, and bronze users.
2. Type

3. Command Name
Modify: MOD QoS
Query: LST QoS:;

4. Range and Unit
RATE0(1X), RATE1(2X), RATE2(4X), RATE3(8X), RATE4(16X), and RATE5(32X)
5. Default Value
RATE4(16X)
6. Setting Tradeoff
The larger the value of this parameter, the higher the maximum FSCH rate allowed for gold,
silver, and bronze users.

7. Remarks
The following inequality shall be satisfied: FSCH rate of gold users >= FSCH rate of silver users
>= FSCH rate of bronze users.
8.6.3 GOLDRSCHRATE / SILVERRSCHRATE / BRONZERSCHRATE
1. Description
This parameter specifies the maximum RSCH rate allowed for the gold, silver, and bronze users.
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD QoS
Query: LST QoS:;

4. Range and Unit
RATE0(1X), RATE1(2X), RATE2(4X), RATE3(8X), RATE4(16X), and RATE5(32X)
5. Default Value
RATE4(16X)
6. Setting Tradeoff
The larger the value of this parameter, the higher the maximum RSCH rate allowed for gold,
silver, and bronze users.

7. Remarks
The following inequality shall be satisfied: RSCH rate of gold users >= RSCH rate of silver users
>= RSCH rate of bronze users.
Though the current QoS scheduling function does not schedule the reverse SCH, when the QoS
scheduling function is on, you can set the maximum R-SCH rates for the gold, silver, and bronze
users.
8.6.4 DATASW (data service scheduling switch)
1. Description
This parameter controls the on and off of the 1x data service scheduling function.
2. Type

3. Command Name
Modify: MOD QoS
Query: LST QoS:;

4. Range and Unit
OFF or ON, OFF meaning disabled and ON enabled.
5. Default Value
OFF, meaning that the 1x data service scheduling function is disabled.

6. Setting Tradeoff
When the data service scheduling switch is on, the forward SCH variant rate switch and the
forward SCH continuing function switch of the MOD CHM command cannot be manually
configured and are on by default. When the data service scheduling switch is changed from on to
off, the forward SCH variant rate switch and the forward SCH continuing function switch cannot
be automatically modified but can be manually configured.

7. Remarks
The relation between the 1x data service QoS function switch and the data service scheduling
switch is as follows:
When the 1x data service QoS function switch is on, by default the data service scheduling switch
is on and cannot be modified manually.
When the 1x data service QoS function switch is off, the data service scheduling switch can be
manually configured. At this time, if the data service scheduling switch is set to on, the 1x data
service is scheduled regardless of the user priority. When the 1x data service QoS function switch
is off, the rate weights and satisfaction weights of the scheduling and the forward/reverse rate
restriction are assigned with default values, therefore all the users are scheduled as ordinary users.
8.7 1X RLP Parameters
8.7.1 SCHLOCKTHRESHOLD (SCH Request Threshold)
1. Description
This parameter indicates the lower threshold for a forward SCH request.
When the data size in the forward buffer area reaches this threshold, the RLP initiates a forward
SCH request.
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD RLP
Query: LST FMRINF: FMRINFO=SDURLP;

4. Range and Unit
500–9000 (in bytes)
1000
6. Setting Tradeoff
If this parameter is excessively low, frequent SCH requests and releases are trigged even though
the flux is low.
If this parameter is excessively high, SCH requests may not be triggered in time, but frequent
SCH requests and releases decrease when the flux is low.

7. Remarks
SCHSTOPCHECKCOUNT must be equal to or less than SCHLOCKTHRESHOLD.
8.7.2 SCHRETRYTIME (SCH Request Retry Interval)
1. Description
This parameter indicates the minimum interval between two SCH requests initiated by the RLP.
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD RLP

4. Range and Unit
20−200 (in frames)
30
6. Setting Tradeoff
None.
7. Remarks
None.
8.7.3 INACTIVETIMERLEN (Active-to-Dormant Inactive Timer Duration)
1. Description
If the RLP receives no new data within the specified duration, that is, the BTS sends no data and
the MS receives no data, the MS enters the dormant state.

2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD RLP

4. Range and Unit
5−1000 (in seconds)
20
6. Setting Tradeoff
If this parameter is excessively low, it is very easy for the MS to enter the dormant state when
short-term discontinuous transmission arises, thus causing frequent SCH requests and releases.
If this parameter is excessively high, the MS occupies the Um interface for a long time even
though no data is transmitted, thus wasting resources.

7. Remarks
None.
8.7.4 REXMITFRAMETHRESHOLD (Retransmit Frame SCH Apply

Threshold)
1. Description
When no SCH is available, the BS RLP initiates SCH requests when the number of frames
required being retransmitted crosses this threshold.

2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD RLP

4. Range and Unit
1−1000 (in frames)
300
6. Setting Tradeoff
None.
7. Remarks
None.
8.7.5 SCHSTOPTHRESHOLD (SCH Stop Threshold)
1. Description
When forward SCHs are being extended, an SCH extension must be stopped if the data size in the
forward butter area is less than this threshold and that the number of frames required to be
retransmitted is below REXMITFRAMETHESHOLD.

2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD RLP

4. Range and Unit
0−9000 (in bytes)
500
6. Setting Tradeoff
SCHSTOPCHECKCOUNT must be equal to or less than SCHLOCKTHRESHOLD.
7. Remarks
None.
8.7.6 SCHSTOPCHECKCOUNT (SCH Stop Check Count)
1. Description
When forward SCHs are being extended, the BSC detects the forward buffer area and the number
of frames required to be retransmitted.
If the data size in the forward buffer area is less than SCHSTOPTHRESHOLD, and the number
of frames required to be retransmitted is less than REXMITRAMETHRESHOLD, the SCH
extensions must stop.
If the number of stopped SCH extensions is greater than this parameter, the RLP stops forward
SCH extension and releases the SCHs in advance.

2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD RLP
4. Range and Unit
1−500
25
6. Setting Tradeoff
None.
7.Remarks
None.
8.7.7 RLPBLOBSWTICH (RLP BLOB Switch)
1. Description
This parameter indicates whether to enable the RLP_BLOB function. Related parameters can be
configured only when the RLP_BLOB function is enabled.

2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD RLPBLOB
Query: LST RLPBLOB

4. Range and Unit
ON (ON)
OFF (OFF)
OFF (off)
6. Setting Tradeoff
None.
7. Remarks
The value OFF means that the RLP layer automatically updates the RTT and that the NAK is
transmitted in (1, 2, 3) mode.
8.7.8 RTT (Estimate of Round Trip Delay between Peer RLPs)
1. Description
This parameter indicates the overtime timer for sending NAKs. If the timer expires and the RLP
receiver does not receive the retransmitted frame, the RLP receiver sends another NAK.
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD RLPBLOB
Query: LST RLPBLOB

4. Range and Unit
0−15
0
6. Setting Tradeoff
None.
7. Remarks
This parameter is effective only when RLPBLOBSWTICH is ON.
8.7.9 NAKROUNDSFWD (Number of NAK Rounds of Send Forward)
1. Description
This parameter indicates the maximum number of rounds for resending forward RLP NAKs.
This parameter is effective only for the downlink transmission at the RLP layer, so the BSC
notifies the MS of this parameter during RLP setup negotiation.

2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD RLPBLOB
Query: LST RLPBLOB

4. Range and Unit
0−7
3
6. Setting Tradeoff
If the value of this parameter is high, the error frames delivered to the upper layer may decrease
after several rounds of RLP layer retransmissions. However, if this parameter is excessively high,
prolonged transmission delay is caused.

If the value of this parameter is low, the RLP layer can deliver the data to the upper layer timely
because retransmissions decrease. However, error frames delivered to the upper layer may
increase.
7. Remarks
8.7.10 NAKROUNDSREV (Number of Round RLP NAK Frames to Send

Reverse)
1. Description
This parameter indicates the maximum number of rounds for resending reverse RLP NAK
frames.
This parameter is effective only for the uplink transmission at the RLP layer.
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD RLPBLOB
Query: LST RLPBLOB

4. Range and Unit
0−7
3
6. Setting Tradeoff
If the value of this parameter is high, the error frames delivered to the upper layer may decrease
after several rounds of RLP layer retransmissions. However, if this parameter is excessively high,
prolonged transmission delay is caused.
If the value of this parameter is low, the RLP layer can deliver the data to the upper layer timely
because retransmissions decrease. However, error frames delivered to the upper layer may
increase.
7. Remarks
8.7.11 NAKPERROUNDFWD0 (Number of 1st-Round NAK Frames to Send

Forward)/NAKPERROUNDFWD1 (Number of 2nd-Round NAK Frames to
Send Forward)/NAKPERROUNDFWD2 (Number of 3rd-Round NAK Frames
to Send Forward)
1. Description
These parameters indicate the maximum number of NAK frames to be transmitted in each round.
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD RLPBLOB
Query: LST RLPBLOB

4. Range and Unit
1−7
Parameter Default Value
NAKPERROUNDFWD0 1
NAKPERROUNDFWD1 2
NAKPERROUNDFWD2 3
6. Setting Tradeoff
If the value of this parameter is high, the probability of receiving the NAK increases and the error
frames delivered to the upper layer decrease. However, if this parameter is excessively high,
lower transmission efficiency and prolonged transmission delay are caused.
If the value of this parameter is low, the probability of receiving the NAK decreases and the error
frames delivered to the upper layer increase.

7. Remarks
These parameters are effective only when RLPBLOBSWTICH is ON.
8.7.12 NAKPERROUNDREV0 (Number of 1st-Round NAK Frames to Send

Reverse)/NAKPERROUNDREV1 (Number of 2nd-Round NAK Frames to
Send Reverse)/NAKPERROUNDREV2 (Number of 3rd-Round NAK Frames
to Send Reverse)
1. Description
They indicate the maximum times to resend reverse NAK frames each round, that is, the
maximum number of NAK frames resent each round.

2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD RLPBLOB
Query: LST RLPBLOB

4. Range and Unit
1−7
Parameter Default Value
NAKPERROUNDREV0 1
NAKPERROUNDREV1 2
NAKPERROUNDREV2 3
6. Setting Tradeoff
If the value of the parameter is large, the times to resend NAK frames each round increases, it can
increase the probability of NAK being received, and decrease the frame error rate delivered to the
upper layer, but if the value is too large, the transmission delay will be increased because the
redundant NAK decreases the link transmission efficiency.
If the value of the parameter is small, the times to resend NAK frames each round decrease, but it
can decrease the probability of NAK being received, and the frame error rate delivered to the
upper layer will be increased.

7. Remarks
They are effective only when RLPBLOBSWTICH is ON.
Chapter 9 GSRDM and EGSRDM Parameters
9.1 Service Redirect Configuration Parameters
9.1.1 PLTTP (Pilot Type)
1. Description
This parameter indicates the current pilot type. According to current pilot type, the MS
determines how to perform the service redirection.
z 0: IS95A/95B cell, that is, IS2000 MSs are redirected.
z 1: IS2000 cell, that is, IS95A/B MSs are redirected.
z 2: IS95A/IS2000 mixed cell, that is, IS95B MSs are redirected.
z 3: IS95A/IS95B/IS2000 mixed cell respectively, that is, the inter-cell redirection with different
types is not performed.

2. Type
This parameter is an Um interface parameter and sent in the SRDM.
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD SRCFG
Query: LST RRMINF: RRMINF=SRCFG;

4. Range and Unit
IS95A95B – IS95A/IS95B CELL
IS2000 – IS2000 CELL
IS95B2000 – IS95B/IS2000 MIXED CELL
IS95A95B2000 – IS95A/IS95B/IS2000 MIXED CELL

IS95A95B2000
6. Setting Tradeoff
None.
7. Remarks
None.
9.1.2 IFCELLTP (Allow Service Redirection Based on Current Cell Type)
1. Description
This parameter is used in combination with the PLTTP. The service redirection based on the cell
type of PLTTP takes effect only when this switch is set to on.
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD SRCFG

4. Range and Unit
YES/NO
OFF
6. Setting Tradeoff
None.
7. Remarks
None.
9.1.3 SRLODSWT (Redirection on Congestion Switch)
1. Description
This parameter specifies whether to enable the redirection on congestion switch.
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD SRCFG

4. Range and Unit
ON (ON)
OFF (OFF)
OFF
6. Setting Tradeoff
None.
7. Remarks
None.
9.1.4 SRSWT1 (Redirection on Illegal MS Switch)
1. Description
This parameter specifies whether to enable the redirection on illegal MS switch.
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD SRCFG

4. Range and Unit
ON (on)
OFF (off)
OFF
6. Setting Tradeoff
None.
7. Remarks
This parameter is specified based on the actual conditions.
9.1.5 SRSID (System ID)
1. Description
This parameter specifies the ID of the system to which the MS is redirected.
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD SRCFG

4. Range and Unit
0−32767
None.
6. Setting Tradeoff
If the MS is redirected, this parameter is set to the SID of a specified system. Otherwise, this
parameter is set to 0.
7. Remarks
The value 0 means that no redirection is performed.
9.1.6 SRNID (Network ID)
1. Description
This parameter indicates the network identification of a specified network to which the MS is
redirected.
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD SRCFG

4. Range and Unit
0−65535
None.
6. Setting Tradeoff
If the MS is redirected, this parameter is set to the NID of a specified network. Otherwise, this
parameter is set to 65535.

7. Remarks
The NID indicates the network identification of the BSC.
9.1.7 BNDCLSS (Band Class)
1. Description
This parameter indicates the band class of the target cell’s redirection system.
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD SRCFG

4. Range and Unit
0−9
This parameter is specified based on actual conditions.
6. Setting Tradeoff
None.
7. Remarks
The band corresponding to the BandClass can be selected directly from the drop-down list on the
Airbridge Maintenance System.
9.1.8 SRFRQX (Service Redirection Target Channel X)
1. Description
This parameter indicates the target frequency used by service redirection. There are six target
frequencies overall, that is, X indicates No. 1 to No. 6. The valid value is 0 to 2047. The
frequency not configured is set to 65535. The value is set based on actual conditions. If it is set to
65535, all the following target frequencies are ineffective. Therefore, the value must be set in
sequence.
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD SRCFG

4. Range and Unit
0−2047 are valid channel numbers, and 65535 indicates an invalid target frequency.
None.
6. Setting Tradeoff
The value is set based on the frequencies of the actual target cell.
7. Remarks
None.
9.2 GSRDM Parameters
9.2.1 RDRCTACCOLC (Redirected Access Overload Classes)
1. Description
If the MS is not used for testing or emergency conditions, the access overload class of the MS is 0
through 9. The access overload class of an MS corresponds to the last digit of the decimal value of
the IMSI.
For example, if the IMSI of an MS is 460030912120003, the access overload class of MS is 3.
When the IMSI of the MS is updated, the access overload class is also updated.
The access overload class of an MS used for testing is 10 and that for emergency conditions is 11.
The access overload classes 12 to 15 are reserved.
Table 8-1 Redirection access overload classes
Sub-Field Bit 1. Description Sub-Field Bit 1. Description
Access overload Access overload

ACCOLC_0 1 ACCOLC_8 1
class 0 class 8

class 1 class 9

class 2 class 10

class 3 class 11

class 4 class 12

class 5 class 13

class 6 class 14

class 7 class 15
2. Type
This parameter is an Um interface parameter and sent in the GSRDM.
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD GSRDM
Query: LST SYSMSGPARA: CCMINF=GSRDM;

4. Range and Unit
Hexadecimal no longer than 4 digits
0
6. Setting Tradeoff
If the redirection of MS of specific access overload class is enabled, the access overload class is 1.
Otherwise, the access overload class is 0.

7. Remarks
None.
9.2.2 RETIFFAIL (Return If Fail Indicator)
1. Description
This parameter is an error return flag.
When an MS fails to select a target system by using the reselection rule contained in this message,
the value of this parameter is set to YES if the MS is allowed to return to the system. Otherwise,
this parameter is set to NO.
If the value of this parameter is YES, the MS may return to original carrier when reselection fails,
and the ping-pong effect may be caused.

2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD GSRDM

4. Range and Unit
YES (yes)
NO (no)
NO
6. Setting Tradeoff
None.
7. Remarks
None.
9.2.3 EXCPREVMS (Exclude Redirection Indicator)
1. Description
This parameter indicates whether the MSs of protocol revision 6 or later are excluded from
redirection.
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD GSRDM

4. Range and Unit
NO: This message is valid for MSs of protocol revision 6 or later.
YES: This message is invalid for MSs of protocol revision 6 or later.

NO
6. Setting Tradeoff
None.
7. Remarks
None.
9.2.4 RECTP (Redirection Record Type)
1. Description
Redirection record type
Description Type (bin)
NDSS close direction '00000000'
Redirected to a simulation system '00000001'
Redirected to a CDMA system '00000010'
Redirected to a TACS simulation system '00000011'
Redirected to a JTACS simulation system '00000100'
Other record type values are reserved
2. Type
Air interface parameter (GSRDM)
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD GSRDM

4. Range and Unit
YES/NO
NO
6. Setting Tradeoff
None.
7. Remarks
Network Directed System Selection (NDSS): A feature that allows the mobile station to
automatically register with a preferred system while roaming, or to be automatically directed by a
service provider, typically the home service provider, to a suggested system, regardless of the
frequency band class, cellular band, or PCS frequency block.
9.3 EGSRDM Parameters
9.3.1 RDRCTPREVINCL (Redirection Mobile Protocol Revision Included)
1. Description
This parameter indicates whether the designated redirection in the redirection message applies to
MSs of specified protocol revisions.

2. Type
This parameter is an Um interface parameter and sent in the EGSRDM.
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD EGSRDM
Query: LST SYSMSGPARA: CCMINF=EGSRDM;

4. Range and Unit
YES (YES)
NO (NO)
NO
6. Setting Tradeoff
If the designated redirection in the redirection message applies to MSs of specified protocol
revisions, the value of this parameter is set to YES. Otherwise, this parameter is set to NO.
7. Remarks
None.
9.3.2 EXCPREV (Excluding Mobile Protocol Revision Indicator)
1. Description
This parameter indicates whether the MS is excluded from global service redirection.
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD EGSRDM

4. Range and Unit
YES (YES)
NO (NO)
NO
6. Setting Tradeoff
If the RDRCTPREVINCL parameter is set to YES, this parameter must be specified for the
BTS. Otherwise, this parameter is invalid.
If the MOBPREV parameter is set between MINRDPREV and MAXRDPREV, and that the
MS is excluded from global service redirection, this parameter must be set to YES. Otherwise, if
the MOBPREV parameter is set beyond the range between MINRDPREV and MAXRDPREV,
and the MS is controlled by service redirection, this parameter must be set to NO.
7. Remarks
None.
9.3.3 MINRDPREV (Min. Redirection Protocol Revision)
1. Description
This parameter indicates the minimum redirection protocol revision.
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD EGSRDM

4. Range and Unit
1−7
1
6. Setting Tradeoff
This parameter applies to the operations, such as redirection and redirection exclusion, specified
by the EXCPREV parameter.

7. Remarks
None.
9.3.4 MAXRDPREV (Max. Redirection Protocol Revision)
1. Description
This parameter indicates the maximum redirection protocol revision.
2. Type
3. Command Name
Modify: MOD EGSRDM

4. Range and Unit
1−7
7
6. Setting Tradeoff
This parameter applies to the operations, such as redirection and redirection exclusion, specified
by the EXCPREV parameter.

7. Remarks
None.

CDMA Performance Parameter (1x Section

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Titolo originale

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

CDMA Performance Parameter (1x Section

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

CDMA Performance Parameter

About This Manual

Product Name Product Version

system. It consists of eight chapters and is organized as follows.

Channel parameters, and Access Channel parameters in the CDMA2000 system.

Chapter 2 Forward Power Distribution Parameters Describes the channel parameter

loop power control..

access load control, and forward and reverse load control.

message scheduling related parameters.

SCH soft handoff related parameters.

About Parameters Name

Parameter Information is shown below:

About Chapter Name

belong to Chapter 4 Load Control and Load Management Parameters.

This field specifies the meaning of the parameter.

About Command Name

XX are also included.

About Range and Unit

About Recommended Value

About Setting Tradeoff

It is used to describe further the meanings of some parameters.

About Configuration Examples

directly for modification.

Acronyms and Abbreviations

Acronyms and Abbreviations Full Name

AAA Authentication, Authorization and Account

BSC Base Station Controller

BTS Base Transceiver Station

CDMA Code Division Multiple Access

FCS Frame Check Sequence

HLR Home Location Register

IMSI International Mobile Subscriber Identity

IOS Inter-Operation Specification

MAC Medium Access Control

MNID Mobile Node Identification

NAI Network Access Identifier

NAK Not Acknowledgement

NID Network Identification

PCF Packet Control Function

PDSN Packet Data Service Node

PDU Packet Data Unit

PPP Point-to-Point Protocol

PZID Packet Zone Identification

QoS Quality of Service

RLP Radio Link Protocol

RoT Rise Over Thermal

SID System Identification

SINR Signal Interference and Noise Ratio

1.1 Synchronization Channel Parameters

system. The value is fixed within a year.

module. The parameters configured by the BSC are ineffective.

LC_STATE and SYS_TIME are set in the same mode.

1.1.2 LOCTMOFF (Local Time Offset)

Mean Time (GMT).

to 50, namely, time zone GMT+9:00.

Query: LST SYSMSGPARA: CCMINF=SCHM;

4. Range and Unit

0–63 (corresponding to –32–31), in a unit of 30 minutes

48 (corresponding to 16), that is time zone GMT+8:00.

LF8 –8 (GMT –12:00) - time zone GMT–12

LF10–10 (GMT –11:00)

LF12–12 (GMT –10:00)

LF14–14 (GMT –09:00)

　 LF8 –8 (GMT –12:00) - time zone GMT–12

　 LF10–10 (GMT –11:00)

　 LF12–12 (GMT –10:00)

　 LF14–14 (GMT –09:00)

　 LF16–16 (GMT –08:00)

　 LF18–18 (GMT –07:00)

　 LF20–20 (GMT –06:00)

　 LF22–22 (GMT –05:00)

　 LF24–24 (GMT –04:00)

　 LF26–26 (GMT –03:00)

　 LF28–28 (GMT –02:00)

　 LF30–30 (GMT –01:00) - time zone GMT–1

　 LF32–32 (GMT +00:00) -Greenwich

　 LF34–34 (GMT +01:00) - time zone GMT+1

　 LF36–36 (GMT +02:00)

　 LF40–40 (GMT +04:00)

　 LF44–44 (GMT +06:00)

　 LF48–48 (GMT +08:00)

　 LF50–50 (GMT +09:00)

　 LF52–52 (GMT +10:00)

　 LF54–54 (GMT +11:00)

　 BPS9600 - 9600 bit/s

　 BPS4800 - 4800 bit/s